Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Om CXT 20713
Om CXT 20713
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
CH570 and CH670 Sugar Cane
Harvesters
OMCXT20713 ISSUE D7 (ENGLISH)
*OMCXT20713*
Identification View
T8T1917 —UN—07MAY15
WM05597,0000E76 -19-29JAN15-1/1
041717
PN=2
Contents
Page
Page
Safety Features
Machine Safety Features....................................05-1 Service Tires Safely..........................................10-19
Keep Hands Away from Knives ........................10-19
Avoid Contact With Moving Parts .....................10-20
Safety Stay Clear of Harvesting Units .........................10-20
Recognize Safety Information ............................10-1 Decommissioning — Proper Recycling
Follow Safety Instructions...................................10-1 and Disposal of Fluids and Components .....10-21
Use Seat Belts....................................................10-1 Remove Accumulated Crop Debris ..................10-21
Instructional Seat................................................10-2
Support Machine Properly ..................................10-2
Practice Safe Maintenance.................................10-3 Safety Signs
Emergency Exit ..................................................10-3 Replace Safety Signs .........................................15-1
Tilt the Cab .........................................................10-4 Operator’s Manual..............................................15-1
Keep Passengers and Children Off Machine .....10-4 Repair and Maintenance ....................................15-1
Protecting Bystanders ........................................10-5 Seat Belt .............................................................15-2
Avoid Backover Accidents ..................................10-5 Emergency Exit ..................................................15-2
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly ..................10-5 Avoid Burns or Smoke Inhalation .......................15-2
Handle Electronic Components and Service Machine Safely ......................................15-3
Brackets Safely ..............................................10-6 Operate and Service Machine Safely .................15-3
Prevent Machine Runaway.................................10-6 Avoid Low Hanging Power Lines........................15-3
Service Safety ....................................................10-7 Starter.................................................................15-4
Service Machines Safely ....................................10-8 Avoid Topper Disks.............................................15-4
Work In Ventilated Area......................................10-8 Avoid Topper Assembly ......................................15-4
Install All Shields and Guards.............................10-9 Avoid Hot Surface...............................................15-5
Wear Protective Clothing....................................10-9 Avoid Cooling Fan ..............................................15-5
Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires........................10-9 Avoid Cooling System ........................................15-5
In Case of Fire ..................................................10-10 Hydraulic Oil and Gas Under Pressure ..............15-6
Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling....10-10 Raise Cab...........................................................15-6
Prepare for Emergencies.................................. 10-11 Avoid Base Cutter...............................................15-7
Avoid Hot Exhaust ............................................ 10-11 Avoid Chopper Drum and Extractor Fan ............15-7
Protect Against High Pressure Spray ............... 10-11 Avoid Extractor Area...........................................15-7
Do Not Open High-Pressure Fuel System........10-12 Avoid Elevator Area............................................15-8
Service Drive Belts Safely ................................10-12 Avoid Elevator Area............................................15-8
Service Accumulator Systems Safely...............10-12 Avoid Crop Dividers............................................15-8
Handling Batteries Safely .................................10-13 Avoid Crop Dividers............................................15-9
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines ....10-13 Avoid Side Knives (If Equipped) .........................15-9
Service Cooling System Safely ........................10-14
Use Safety Lights and Devices.........................10-14 Operator's Station
Use Cylinder Safety Stops................................10-15 General View of Controls and Instruments.........20-1
Safe Transport of Harvester .............................10-15 Manual Storage Location....................................20-1
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating........10-16 Emergency Exit ..................................................20-2
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ..............................10-16 Brake Pedals (Wheel Machines Only)................20-2
Use Caution on Hillsides ..................................10-17 Floor Pedals (Track Machines Only) ..................20-2
Use Caution On Slopes When Turning ............10-17 Elevator Swing Pedals (If Equipped) ..................20-3
Harvester Elevator Safety.................................10-17 Adjust Floor Pedals (If Equipped).......................20-3
Avoid Electrical Power Lines ............................10-18 Seat Safety Switch .............................................20-4
Park Machine Safely.........................................10-18 Adjust ComfortCommand™ Operator's
Follow Tire Recommendations .........................10-18 Seat (Style A) .................................................20-5
i 041717
PN=1
Contents
Page Page
ii 041717
PN=2
Contents
Page Page
iii 041717
PN=3
Contents
Page Page
iv 041717
PN=4
Contents
Page Page
v 041717
PN=5
Contents
Page Page
vi 041717
PN=6
Contents
Page
vii 041717
PN=7
Contents
viii 041717
PN=8
Safety Features
Machine Safety Features
T8T1918 —UN—18MAY15
A—Cab Safety Features: D—Mechanical Safety Stops J— Reflectors and Reflective P—Brush Rails and Service
Operator Presence System, (Topper and Lift Cylinders) Tape Access
Seat Belts, Horn, Emergency E—Shields and Guards K—Safety Decals Q—Windshield Cleaning Steps
Exit Hammer, Park Brake, F— Backup Alarm L— Warning Lights and Turn R—Battery Disconnect Switch
Turn Signals, Door Lock, G—Fire Extinguishers Signals S—Engine Door Safety Switch
Mirrors H—Rear View Mirrors M—Slip-Resistant Platforms
B—Handrails I— Slow Moving Vehicle Sign N—Slip-Resistant Ladders and
C—Driving Lights, Handholds Handrails
O—Emergency Exit Door
In addition to the safety features shown here, other manual contribute to the safe operation of this machine
components and systems, safety lights on the machine, when combined with the care and concern of a capable
and safety messages and instructions in the operator’s operator.
WM05597,0000ED4 -19-18MAY15-1/1
05-1 041717
PN=11
Safety
Recognize Safety Information
T8130000497 —UN—14FEB13
T8130000498 —UN—14FEB13
Figure A Figure B
Figure A: This symbol is used for a specific hazard as The additional blocks of the safety sign will be pictorials of
shown in the pictorial in the center of the triangle. the avoidance action to be taken to avoid the hazard.
Figure B: This symbol is used for a general alert.
WM05597,000089D -19-01MAR13-1/1
TS201 —UN—15APR13
available from your John Deere dealer.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls
properly. Do not let anyone operate without instruction.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.
If you do not understand any part of this manual and need
Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair the
assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.
function and/or safety and affect machine life.
DX,READ -19-16JUN09-1/1
KR43067,0000BB9 -19-25SEP12-1/1
10-1 041717
PN=12
Safety
Instructional Seat
The instructional seat, if so equipped, has been provided
only for training operators or diagnosing machine
problems.
TS1730 —UN—24MAY13
DX,SEAT,NA -19-22AUG13-1/1
TS229 —UN—23AUG88
Do not support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow tiles,
or props that may crumble under continuous load. Do not
work under a machine that is supported solely by a jack.
Follow recommended procedures in this manual.
When implements or attachments are used with a
machine, always follow safety precautions listed in the
implement or attachment operator's manual.
DX,LOWER -19-24FEB00-1/1
10-2 041717
PN=13
Safety
TS218 —UN—23AUG88
welding on machine.
Falling while cleaning or working at height can cause
serious injury. Use a ladder or platform to easily reach
each location. Use sturdy and secure footholds and
handholds.
DX,SERV -19-28FEB17-1/1
Emergency Exit
In an emergency, the right-hand door may be used as
an exit.
Seat belt may be cut and windshield , right-hand, or
left-hand door window glass broken with hammer to exit
T8T1771 —UN—06JAN15
cab in an emergency.
WM05597,0000E2C -19-22MAY15-1/1
10-3 041717
PN=14
Safety
T8140000100 —UN—04MAY15
prevent damage. Shut OFF engine and remove key.
Verify that cab safety stop is engaged before entering area
below cab. (See Cab Tilt Procedure in Maintenance—As
Required section).
WM05597,0000E2D -19-18MAY15-1/1
TS253 —UN—23AUG88
allowed on the platform areas of the machine.
Passengers are subject to injury such as being thrown
off the machine. Passengers also obstruct the operator's
view resulting in the machine being operated in an unsafe
manner.
Children should never be allowed on the machine or in the
harvester cab when the engine is running.
The instructional seat should only be used for instruction
or short periods of machine observation, and not for the
accommodation of children.
WM05597,00012F9 -19-19MAY15-1/1
10-4 041717
PN=15
Safety
Protecting Bystanders
Be sure everyone is clear of the harvester before starting
the engine or moving the steering wheel.
CM989999005 —UN—06JAN00
AG,T803324,47 -19-14JUL99-1/1
PC10857XW —UN—15APR13
obstructed or when in close quarters.
Do not rely on a camera to determine if personnel or
obstacles are behind the machine. The system can be
limited by many factors including maintenance practices,
environmental conditions, and operating range.
DX,AVOID,BACKOVER,ACCIDENTS -19-30AUG10-1/1
DX,WW,MOUNT -19-12OCT11-1/1
10-5 041717
PN=16
Safety
TS249 —UN—23AUG88
install or remove components in wet or icy conditions.
If installing or servicing a RTK base station on a tower or
other tall structure, use a certified climber.
If installing or servicing a global positioning receiver mast
used on an implement, use proper lifting techniques and
wear proper protective equipment. The mast is heavy and
can be awkward to handle. Two people are required when
mounting locations are not accessible from the ground
or from a service platform.
DX,WW,RECEIVER -19-24AUG10-1/1
TS177 —UN—11JAN89
engine only from operator’s seat, with transmission in
neutral or park.
DX,BYPAS1 -19-29SEP98-1/1
10-6 041717
PN=17
Safety
Service Safety
When a service person or mechanic is not familiar with or removed. Always make sure that all raised
all systems on this harvester, extra caution should be components and implements are correctly blocked.
used when performing service work. A good working Be alert for possible pressure when disconnecting any
knowledge of the system and its components is important device from a system that utilizes pressure.
for removal or disassembly. The following is a list of basic
precautions that should always be observed: CAUTION: Liquid escaping from a small hole can
1. Read and understand all warning plates and decals be almost invisible. Use wood or cardboard,
before lubricating or performing other maintenance. instead of your hand, when searching for
suspected leaks. Escaping fluid under pressure
2. Always wear protective glasses and footwear when can have sufficient force to penetrate the skin.
working. In particular, wear safety glasses when
pounding on any part of the machine or attachments 6. Before disconnecting any lines verify that all pressure
with a hammer. Use protective clothing when welding. in the system is relieved. Before applying pressure,
DO NOT wear any loosely fitting or torn clothing. make sure that all lines, fittings, and connections are
Remove all jewelry before working on the equipment. tight and undamaged.
IMPORTANT: Before mounting machine, verify 7. If you are injured by escaping fluid under pressure,
that there are no people working under see a doctor immediately. A serious infection or
or on machine. reaction may result if proper medical attention is not
received immediately.
All operators must blow the horn several
times before starting the machine. NOTE: Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically
removed within a few hours or gangrene may
Verify that all people near machine know that result. Further information is available from Deere
when the horn blows, the machine is about to be & Company Medical Department in Moline, Illinois.
started, and to move away as soon as possible. 1-800-822-8262 or 1-309-748-5636.
3. Use the following procedure when preparing to service 8. Lower all implements to the ground before working on
machine: the machine. If this cannot be done, make sure that
a. Parking Procedure: the implement is properly blocked or on service stops
to prevent it from dropping unexpectedly.
1. Lower topper onto safety stop.
2. Lower base cutter lift cylinders onto safety stops. 9. To avoid injuries, use a hoist when lifting components
3. Lower crop dividers. that weigh over 23 kg (50 lb.). When using a hoist,
4. Lower elevator. verify that all hooks are correctly positioned.
5. Lower side knives (if equipped). 10. To avoid burns, be alert for hot parts on the machine
b. Shut OFF engine and remove key. after it has stopped. Be careful of hot fluids in lines,
tubes, and components.
c. Shut OFF battery disconnect switch and install lock
out device. 11. Use caution when removing cover plates. Gradually
loosen the last two cap screws or nuts at the opposite
d. Before beginning any hydraulic repairs, you must ends of the cover or device. Carefully pry the cover
first relieve pressure from the hydraulic system. loose to relieve any spring or other tension before
removing it completely.
CAUTION: In the event repairs must be made 12. Use caution when removing filler caps, breathers, or
to the base cutter lift and/or topper lift, plugs on the machine. Hold a rag over the cap or plug
hydraulic pressure must be relieved by lowering to prevent being sprayed or splashed by pressurized
base cutter and/or topper. and probably hot fluids.
4. When possible, make all repairs with machine parked 13. Always use proper tools in good condition. Before
on level ground. Block machine so it cannot move. performing any service, verify that you know how to
use the proper tools.
CAUTION: DO NOT work on any machine that is 14. Replace all fasteners with same SAE or metric size
only supported by lift jacks or a hoist. and grade. Never substitute a softer part where a
hardened part is used, and never substitute a harder
5. Relieve all pressure in air, oil, or water systems before part where a softer part is used.
any lines, fittings, or related parts are disconnected
10-7 041717
PN=18
Safety
TS228 —UN—23AUG88
Remove rings and other jewelry to prevent electrical
shorts and entanglement in moving parts.
DX,LOOSE -19-04JUN90-1/1
TS220 —UN—15APR13
doors and get outside air into the area.
DX,AIR -19-17FEB99-1/1
10-8 041717
PN=19
Safety
TS677 —UN—21SEP89
Wear close-fitting clothes. Stop the engine and be sure
fans, belts, pulleys, and drives are stopped before making
adjustments, connections, or cleaning near fans and their
drive components.
KR43067,0000BBA -19-25SEP12-1/1
TS206 —UN—15APR13
DX,WEAR2 -19-03MAR93-1/1
TS202 —UN—23AUG88
tank outdoors.
Prevent fires by keeping machine clean of accumulated
trash, grease, and debris. Always clean up spilled fuel.
Use only an approved fuel container for transporting
flammable liquids.
Never fill fuel container in pickup truck with plastic bed
liner. Always place fuel container on ground before
refueling. Touch fuel container with fuel dispenser nozzle Do not store fuel container where there is an open flame,
before removing can lid. Keep fuel dispenser nozzle in spark, or pilot light such as within a water heater or other
contact with fuel container inlet when filling. appliance.
DX,FIRE1 -19-12OCT11-1/1
10-9 041717
PN=20
Safety
In Case of Fire
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury.
TS227 —UN—15APR13
machine immediately and move safely away from the fire.
Do not return to the machine! The number one priority
is safety.
Call the fire department. A portable fire extinguisher can
put out a small fire or contain it until the fire department
arrives; but portable extinguishers have limitations.
Always put the safety of the operator and bystanders first.
If attempting to extinguish a fire, keep your back to the 1. Pull the pin. Hold the extinguisher with the nozzle
wind with an unobstructed escape path so you can move pointing away from you, and release the locking
away quickly if the fire cannot be extinguished. mechanism.
Read the fire extinguisher instructions and become familiar 2. Aim low. Point the extinguisher at the base of the fire.
with their location, parts, and operation before a fire starts.
Local fire departments or fire equipment distributors may 3. Squeeze the lever slowly and evenly.
offer fire extinguisher training and recommendations.
4. Sweep the nozzle from side-to-side.
If your extinguisher does not have instructions, follow
these general guidelines:
DX,FIRE4 -19-22AUG13-1/1
RG22142 —UN—17MAR14
dissipating additive. However, there are many factors that
can reduce the effectiveness of the additive over time.
Static charges can build up in ULSD fuel while it is flowing
through fuel delivery systems. Static electricity discharge
when combustible vapors are present could result in a
fire or explosion.
Therefore, it is important to ensure that the entire system
used to refuel your machine (fuel supply tank, transfer
pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others) is properly
grounded and bonded. Consult with your fuel or fuel
system supplier to ensure that the delivery system is in
compliance with fueling standards for proper grounding
and bonding practices. RG21992 —UN—21AUG13
DX,FUEL,STATIC,ELEC -19-12JUL13-1/1
10-10 041717
PN=21
Safety
TS291 —UN—15APR13
DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1
RG17488 —UN—21AUG09
operation. Exhaust gases and components reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people, ignite, or melt
common materials.
DX,EXHAUST -19-20AUG09-1/1
TS1343 —UN—18MAR92
pressure spray injected into the skin must be surgically
removed within a few hours or gangrene may result.
Doctors unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference
a knowledgeable medical source. Such information is
available from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
DX,SPRAY -19-16APR92-1/1
10-11 041717
PN=22
Safety
TS1343 —UN—18MAR92
Only technicians familiar with this type of system can
perform repairs. (See your John Deere dealer.)
DX,WW,HPCR1 -19-07JAN03-1/1
TS285 —UN—23AUG88
machine is running. Always set park brake, shut OFF
the engine, and remove the key.
• Do not attempt to clean belts with flammable cleaning
solvents.
WM05597,0000D43 -19-02DEC13-1/1
TS281 —UN—15APR13
near a pressurized accumulator or pressurized line.
Relieve pressure from the pressurized system before
removing accumulator.
Relieve pressure from the hydraulic system before
removing accumulator. Never attempt to relieve hydraulic
system or accumulator pressure by loosening a fitting.
Accumulators cannot be repaired.
DX,WW,ACCLA2 -19-22AUG03-1/1
10-12 041717
PN=23
Safety
TS204 —UN—15APR13
Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp first and
replace grounded clamp last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous and strong
enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause
blindness if splashed into eyes.
Avoid hazards by:
• Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area
• Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves
• Avoiding use of air pressure to clean batteries
• Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added
• Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte
• Using correct battery booster or charger procedure.
If acid is spilled on skin or in eyes:
1. Flush skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not
exceed 2 L (2 qt.).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related
TS203 —UN—23AUG88
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
DX,WW,BATTERIES -19-02DEC10-1/1
DX,TORCH -19-10DEC04-1/1
10-13 041717
PN=24
Safety
TS281 —UN—15APR13
DX,WW,COOLING -19-19AUG09-1/1
TS951 —UN—12APR90
Deere dealer.
DX,FLASH -19-07JUL99-1/1
10-14 041717
PN=25
Safety
CM989999016 —UN—06JAN00
WM05597,00010E2 -19-25SEP14-1/1
T8140000372 —UN—04MAY15
WM05597,0000EBD -19-12MAR14-1/1
10-15 041717
PN=26
Safety
TS220 —UN—15APR13
• Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area
to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed,
wear an approved respirator before heating or welding.
• If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
• If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with
soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or
paint stripper containers and other flammable material
from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic
before welding or heating. fumes and dust away.
Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
will take place.
DX,PAINT -19-24JUL02-1/1
X9811 —UN—23AUG88
Replace worn or damaged hose assemblies immediately
with John Deere approved replacement parts.
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
with this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands medical source. Such information is available in
and body from high-pressure fluids. English from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A., by calling 1-800-822-8262 or +1
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid 309-748-5636.
injected into the skin must be surgically removed within
a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar
DX,FLUID -19-12OCT11-1/1
10-16 041717
PN=27
Safety
CM989999019 —UN—06JAN00
hydraulic oil to proper level.
Before operating on extremely steep slopes, fill hydraulic
system overfull in sight glass, from 4 to 8 L (1 to 2 gal.).
This is particularly important when using large hydraulic
cylinders, due to the volume of oil used to extend them.
WM05597,00007FE -19-19FEB13-1/1
T8130000097 —UN—10JAN13
behind machine before turning.
The danger of an overturn increases greatly when elevator
is swung to left or right during a turn.
JR07957,000023F -19-10JAN13-1/1
WM05597,000071F -19-28JAN13-1/1
10-17 041717
PN=28
Safety
T8140000101 —UN—11MAR14
on public roads, it may come into contact with low-hanging
electrical cables. This would result in the operator
suffering a severe electrical shock.
Maintain minimum distance of 3 m (10 ft.) plus twice the
length of power line insulators.
WM05597,0000EA7 -19-11MAR14-1/1
TS230 —UN—24MAY89
DX,PARK -19-04JUN90-1/1
H111235 —UN—13MAY14
Use of other than prescribed tires may decrease stability,
affect steering, result in premature tire failure, or cause
other durability or safety issues.
DX,TIRE,INFO -19-19MAY14-1/1
10-18 041717
PN=29
Safety
RXA0103438 —UN—11JUN09
equipment and experience to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate
the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld
or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause
an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension
hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety Wheels and tires are heavy. When handling wheels and
cage if available. tires use a safe lifting device or get an assistant to help
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged lift, install, or remove.
rims, or missing lug bolts and nuts.
DX,WW,RIMS -19-28FEB17-1/1
CM989999025 —UN—06JAN00
WM05597,0000800 -19-19FEB13-1/1
10-19 041717
PN=30
Safety
CM989999026 —UN—06JAN00
AG,T803324,60 -19-14JUL99-1/1
ES118704 —UN—21MAR95
remove key before servicing or unclogging machine.
Stay clear of harvester during its harvesting operation to
avoid flying debris.
MB22538,0000081 -19-06SEP13-1/1
10-20 041717
PN=31
Safety
TS1133 —UN—15APR13
• Use appropriate tools and personal protective
equipment such as clothing, gloves, face shields or
glasses, during the removal or handling of objects and
materials.
• Follow instructions for specialized components.
• Release stored energy by lowering suspended machine
elements, relaxing springs, disconnecting the battery
or other electrical power, and releasing pressure in
hydraulic components, accumulators, and other similar filters; batteries; and, other substances or parts.
systems. Burning of flammable fluids or components in other than
• Minimize exposure to components which may have specially designed incinerators may be prohibited by law
residue from agricultural chemicals, such as fertilizers and could result in exposure to harmful fumes or ashes.
and pesticides. Handle and dispose of these • Service and dispose of air conditioning systems
components appropriately. appropriately. Government regulations may require
• Carefully drain engines, fuel tanks, radiators, hydraulic a certified service center to recover and recycle air
cylinders, reservoirs, and lines before recycling conditioning refrigerants which could damage the
components. Use leak-proof containers when draining atmosphere if allowed to escape.
fluids. Do not use food or beverage containers. • Evaluate recycling options for tires, metal, plastic,
• Do not pour waste fluids onto the ground, down a drain, glass, rubber, and electronic components which may be
or into any water source. recyclable, in part or completely.
• Observe all national, state, and local laws, regulations, • Contact your local environmental or recycling center, or
or ordinances governing the handling or disposal of your John Deere dealer for information on the proper
waste fluids (example: oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid); way to recycle or dispose of waste.
DX,DRAIN -19-01JUN15-1/1
TS227 —UN—15APR13
battery disconnect switch.
AS09261,00000AB -19-11AUG16-1/1
10-21 041717
PN=32
Safety Signs
Replace Safety Signs
Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Use this
operator’s manual for correct safety sign placement.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
TS201 —UN—15APR13
DX,SIGNS -19-18AUG09-1/1
Operator’s Manual
This operator’s manual contains all important information
necessary for safe machine operation. Carefully observe
all safety rules to avoid accidents.
T8T2562 —UN—21MAY15
WM05597,00012FD -19-20MAY15-1/1
T8T2561 —UN—21MAY15
WM05597,00012FE -19-20MAY15-1/1
15-1 041717
PN=33
Safety Signs
Seat Belt
The instructional seat is for training operators or
diagnosing machine problems. Keep all other riders and
children off. Use the seat belt whenever operating the
machine or riding as an observer.
T8T2560 —UN—21MAY15
WM05597,00012FF -19-20MAY15-1/1
Emergency Exit
Right-hand window is an emergency exit door.
If necessary, remove hammer and hit window to break
glass to exit cab. See your John Deere dealer for window
replacement.
T8T2563 —UN—21MAY15
The emergency hammer is equipped with a cutting device
to cut the seat belt if its latch does not release.
WM05597,0001300 -19-22MAY15-1/1
T8T1306 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,0000F85 -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-2 041717
PN=34
Safety Signs
T8T2456 —UN—11MAY15
WM05597,00012EE -19-22MAY15-1/1
T8T1307 —UN—14OCT14
Remove ignition key and turn battery disconnect
switch when servicing.
3. Machine should be lowered prior to turning off engine
and when machine is not in use.
4. No Rider except in instructional seat.
5. Do not access machine while it is running.
6. Possible flying object or debris.
WM05597,0000F74 -19-16OCT14-1/1
T8T1308 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,0000F75 -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-3 041717
PN=35
Safety Signs
Starter
Do not start engine by shorting across starter or solenoid
terminals.
Machine components may move if normal circuitry is
bypassed.
T8T1309 —UN—14OCT14
Keep protective cover over starter terminal.
WM05597,0000F76 -19-16OCT14-1/1
T8130000073 —UN—23JAN13
WM05597,0000EAD -19-12MAR14-1/1
T8130000072 —UN—23JAN13
WM05597,0000EAE -19-12MAR14-1/1
15-4 041717
PN=36
Safety Signs
T8T1310 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,0000F77 -19-22MAY15-1/1
T8T1312 —UN—14OCT14
T8T1311 —UN—14OCT14
NOTE: Decal located on both sides of machine. Keep hands out of contact with fans and stay clear until
rotation has stopped.
Cutting or shearing of fingers or hand.
WM05597,00010F4 -19-16OCT14-1/1
T8T1313 —UN—14OCT14
Keep area clean and clear of debris and flammable
materials. Refer to operator’s manual instructions.
WM05597,0000F79 -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-5 041717
PN=37
Safety Signs
T8T1314 —UN—14OCT14
T8T1315 —UN—14OCT14
Decal Located On Both Sides Of Machine
Possible high-pressure fluid injection into body.
Get immediate medical treatment if fluid injection occurs.
Refer to the Technical Manual’s instructions on servicing
and replacing accumulators.
T8T1316 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,00010F5 -19-16OCT14-1/1
Raise Cab
Possible Crushing
IMPORTANT: Topper boom must be lowered to
lift cylinder safety lock or fully lowered
before tilting the cab.
T8T1317 —UN—14OCT14
Refer to manual on raising or lowering cab/platform.
Ensure jacking lock properly in place before and during
entering area below cab/platform.
WM05597,0000F7B -19-22MAY15-1/1
15-6 041717
PN=38
Safety Signs
T8T1318 —UN—14OCT14
rotation has completely stopped.
WM05597,0000F7C -19-20OCT14-1/1
T8T1319 —UN—14OCT14
rotation has completely stopped.
WM05597,0000F7D -19-17OCT14-1/1
Crush Area.
Stay clear of rotating extractor components and housing
T8T1320 —UN—14OCT14
while engine is running.
WM05597,0000F7E -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-7 041717
PN=39
Safety Signs
Crush area.
Stay clear of the rotating/swinging elevator area.
T8T1321 —UN—21MAY15
WM05597,0000F7F -19-16OCT14-1/1
T8T1322 —UN—21MAY15
running.
WM05597,0000F80 -19-16OCT14-1/1
Possible entanglement.
Stay clear of crop dividers.
T8T1323 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,0000F81 -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-8 041717
PN=40
Safety Signs
Possible crushing.
Do not enter or get under any portion of the front end of
T8T1324 —UN—14OCT14
harvester without first installing and locking in place front
end lift cylinder locks.
WM05597,0000F82 -19-16OCT14-1/1
T8T1325 —UN—14OCT14
have completely stopped.
WM05597,0000EBC -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-9 041717
PN=41
Operator's Station
General View of Controls and Instruments
T8T1631 —UN—13NOV14
A—Digital Cornerpost Display C—Multi-Function Lever F— CommandTouch™ Armrest
B—GreenStar™ 3 (GS3) 2630 D—Steering Column Console
Display E—Turn Signal and Light
Selection Lever
A—Compartment
T8T1567 —UN—13NOV14
WM05597,0000DD7 -19-26NOV14-1/1
20-1 041717
PN=42
Operator's Station
Emergency Exit
1. Pull down on top to remove hammer (A).
2. If seat belt does not unbuckle, cut with knife (B) in
handle.
T8T1772 —UN—26FEB15
3. If doors do not open, use hammer to break left-hand
or right-hand door window glass and exit cab. See
your John Deere dealer for window replacement.
A—Hammer B—Blade
WM05597,0000DD8 -19-20MAY15-1/1
T8T562 —UN—13JUN14
Right Brake Pedal (B)—Press and hold to slow or stop
right-hand rear wheel to aid in turning.
NOTE: To operate both brakes together, operator must
engage transport switch on armrest console.
A—Left-Hand Brake Pedal B—Right-Hand Brake Pedal Right-Hand Side Of Steering Column
WM05597,000117B -19-02DEC14-1/1
T8T562 —UN—13JUN14
Right-Hand Foot Pedal (B)— Controls the track high/low
option.
20-2 041717
PN=43
Operator's Station
T8T1665 —UN—02DEC14
A—Left-Hand Elevator Swing B—Right-Hand Elevator Swing
Pedal Pedal
WM05597,000117A -19-02DEC14-1/1
T8140000087 —UN—03MAR14
A—Hardware (2 used) B—Pedal Assembly
WM05597,0000EA0 -19-02DEC14-1/1
20-3 041717
PN=44
Operator's Station
T8T2445 —UN—07MAY15
The operator must be seated and harvesting functions 2. Push down and pull back on harvesting functions
and auxiliary functions switches cycled to start harvesting switch to middle position.
functions. 3. Push down and pull back on auxiliary functions switch.
4. Push down and push forward on harvesting functions
If the operator leaves the seat for more than five sec., switch.
harvesting functions stop. To restart harvesting functions, 5. Push down and push forward on auxiliary functions
the operator must: switch.
1. Return to a seated position in operator’s seat.
WM05597,00012E1 -19-07MAY15-1/1
20-4 041717
PN=45
Operator's Station
T8T771 —UN—01DEC14
NOTE: Seat is equipped with an operator presence If the seat does not float or ”pump” up, see
system. If harvesting functions are engaged your John Deere dealer.
and the operator leaves the seat, the
harvesting functions stop. D—Weight/Height Indicator provides a visual indicator
to operator on current weight and height. Use weight
A—Fore/Aft Adjustment Handle slides seat forward or and height adjustment handle to adjust seat until green
rearward for the best working position. marking is visible in indicator.
B—Vertical Shock Dampener Control limits amount of NOTE: Adjust seat to operator weight and height.
”upward motion” the seat suspension provides. This allows the operator to get the most ride
NOTE: Push control forward for a soft ride or move zone protection. Seat has a built-in buffer at
handle back for a firm ride. Medium firmness the high and low end of vertical seat travel,
is between these two positions . resulting in a much smoother ride.
C—Weight/Height Adjustment Handle raises or lowers E—Fore/Aft Isolation Adjustment Handle locks-out or
the seat. Pull up on handle to raise seat or push down on releases forward or rearward movements. Pull up on
handle to lower seat. Adjust seat until green marking is handle to lock or push down on handle to release.
visible in weight and height indicator. NOTE: Fore/Aft isolator allows shock impacts
NOTE: Suspension can be adjusted to reach limits to be absorbed.
in minimum and maximum heights, which in
effect locks out the suspension system making it F—Swivel Handle locks-out or releases swivel motion
rigid. Suspension height control also hits limits if of seat.
adjusted too close to the extremes.
Do not operate the compressor for more than
one minute when adjusting seat.
AS09261,0000150 -19-09NOV16-1/1
20-5 041717
PN=46
Operator's Station
T8T4973 —UN—08NOV16
NOTE: Seat is equipped with an operator presence D— Weight/Height Indicator provides a visual indicator
system. If harvesting functions are engaged to operator on current weight and height. Use weight
and the operator leaves the seat, the and height adjustment handle to adjust seat until green
harvesting functions stop. marking is visible in indicator.
A— Fore/Aft Adjustment Handle slides the seat forward NOTE: Adjust seat to operator weight and height.
or rearward for the best working position. This allows the operator to get the most ride
zone protection. Seat has a built-in buffer at
B— Vertical Shock Dampener Control limits amount of the high and low end of vertical seat travel,
“upward motion” the seat suspension provides. resulting in a much smoother ride.
NOTE: Push control forward for a soft ride or move
handle back for a firm ride. Medium firmness E— Seat Bottom Depth Adjustment Handle moves seat
is between these two positions. bottom forward or rearward for the best working position.
F— Seat Bottom Angle Adjustment Handle raises or
C— Weight/Height Adjustment Handle raises or lowers lowers seat cushion for the best working position.
the seat. Pull up on the handle to raise seat or push down
on handle to lower seat. Adjust seat until green marking is G— Fore/Aft isolation Adjustment Handle locks out
visible in weight and height indicator. or releases forward or rearward movements. Pull up on
handle to lock or push down on handle to release.
NOTE: Suspension can be adjusted to reach limits
in minimum and maximum heights, which in NOTE: Fore/Aft isolator allows shock impacts
effect locks out the suspension system making it to be absorbed.
rigid. Suspension height control also hits limits if
adjusted too close to the extremes. H— Swivel Handle locks-out or releases swivel motion
of seat.
Do not operate the compressor for more than
one minute when adjusting seat.
If the seat does not float or “pump” up, see
your John Deere dealer.
AS09261,0000152 -19-09NOV16-1/1
20-6 041717
PN=47
Operator's Station
H97562 —UN—02JUN11
desired position and release handle.
AS09261,0000151 -19-09NOV16-1/1
T8T4974 —UN—08NOV16
(221 lb·in)
AS09261,0000153 -19-09NOV16-1/1
20-7 041717
PN=48
Operator's Station
H96631 —UN—26MAY10
WM05597,0000EEC -19-25MAR14-1/1
H96632 —UN—02NOV10
Turn temperature control dial (D) clockwise to decrease
temperature or counterclockwise to increase temperature.
WM05597,0000DDA -19-04FEB14-1/1
20-8 041717
PN=49
Operator's Station
Seat Belts
CAUTION: Inspect seat belts and mounting
hardware on your machine at least once a
year. If seat belt system, including mounting
hardware, buckle, belt, or retractor, shows any
H96657 —UN—01JUN10
sign of damage such as cuts, fraying, extreme
or unusual wear, discoloration or abrasion,
the entire seat belt system should be replaced
immediately. For your safety, replace the belt
system only with replacement parts approved for
your machine, see your John Deere dealer.
H97713 —UN—20AUG10
forward or rearward. Tighten knob to lock control console
into place.
A—Knob B—Knob
WM05597,0000EED -19-23FEB15-1/1
T8140000066 —UN—06FEB14
A—Arm B—Display
WM05597,0000EEE -19-23FEB15-1/1
20-9 041717
PN=50
Operator's Station
H94452 —UN—14MAY10
of right-hand window. These outlets provide key-switched
or unswitched power.
Spade terminal (B) is direct positive power at all times.
Spade terminal (C) is ground.
Spade terminal (D) is auxiliary power (key switch ON).
WM05597,0000DDE -19-04FEB14-1/1
Fire Extinguishers
A general-purpose fire extinguisher and a pressurized
water fire extinguisher with mounting brackets are
installed on your machine.
Read label on extinguishers and become familiar with
instructions on how to use and maintain them. Once
extinguisher is discharged, no matter for how long, it must
be recharged.
IMPORTANT: Pressurized water fire extinguisher must
not be exposed to freezing temperatures unless
protected with antifreeze. See instructions decal
on extinguisher for further information.
H92841 —UN—16SEP08
General-Purpose And Water Fire Extinguisher
WM05597,0000DDF -19-07APR14-1/1
20-10 041717
PN=51
Operator's Station
T8T546 —UN—10JUN14
A pressurized water fire extinguisher (A) and
general-purpose fire extinguisher (B) are on the left-hand
side of the cooling package.
WM05597,0000DE0 -19-09JAN15-1/1
Steering Column
A— Horn allows operator to warn bystanders to stay clear.
B— Turn Signal Switch allows operator to indicate left or
right-hand turns.
T8140000079 —UN—20FEB14
Loosen hub and push or pull wheel to position. Slightly
tighten hub to hold steering wheel in position.
D— Starter Switch allows key switch to be turned to:
NOTE: Key must be pushed in to turn to
Accessories position.
First Position....................................................... Accessories
Second Position ............................................................. OFF
Third Position ................................................................ Run
CAUTION: Adjust steering wheel only when
Fourth Position .............................................................. Start
machine is stopped.
CAUTION: Adjust column only when machine F— Steering Wheel Tilt Adjustment allows operator to
is stopped. Do not step on pedal without move steering column with handle to desired position.
holding steering wheel.
Pull up on handle to release lock and move steering wheel
E— Steering Column Horizontal Adjustment allows to desired position. Release handle to lock into desired
operator to move steering column with pedal to desired position.
position.
Press pedal to release lock on steering column and move
column to desired position. Column locks when pedal is
released.
WM05597,0000DE1 -19-06OCT14-1/1
20-11 041717
PN=52
Operator's Station
H96489 —UN—22JUN11
column is used to control the following:
• OFF Position (B)
• Wiper Intermittent Operation (C)
• Wiper ON Position (D)
• Windshield Washer (E)
To add washer fluid to machine:
1. Open left-hand engine compartment door.
2. Add washer fluid to tank (F).
3. Close tank cap and compartment door.
T8120002650 —UN—09JAN13
A—Windshield Wiper and D—Wiper ON Position
Washer Switch E—Windshield Washer
B—OFF Position F— Tank
C—Wiper Intermittent Position
WM05597,0000ED0 -19-19MAR14-1/1
T8T1293 —UN—25SEP14
• Left-Hand Side Wiper Switch (A)
• Right-Hand Side Wiper Switch (B)
• Side Washer Switch (C)
A—Left-Hand Side Wiper C—Side Washer Switch
Switch
B—Right-Hand Side Wiper
Switch
WM05597,00010D3 -19-06OCT14-1/1
20-12 041717
PN=53
Operator's Station
T8T1568 —UN—13NOV14
A—Diagnostic Connector
20-13 041717
PN=54
Overhead Control Panel
Overhead Control Panel
T8T1997 —UN—04MAY15
A—Radio
WM05597,0000F60 -19-10FEB15-1/1
Radio Controls
C E
D
B
CQ298925 —UN—20MAR15
F
A
J I H G
A—Volume Control D—Radio Display G—Audio (AUD) Key J— Source Select (SRC) Key
B—Power/Mute Key E—Menu Key H—Key Block (1—6)
C—Band (BND) Key F— Multi-Function Rocker Switch I— Traffic Announcements (TA)
Key
OU90500,00003B6 -19-20MAR15-1/1
25-1 041717
PN=55
Overhead Control Panel
Antenna
If radio is not used or machine is being transported, pull
radio antenna (A) down and retain with clip (B).
H94462 —UN—01NOV10
WM05597,0000DFF -19-10FEB14-1/1
H94464 —UN—14MAY10
H96333 —UN—14MAY10
IMPORTANT: Do not install a radio requiring more than
3 amps or electrical system may malfunction.
CQ298926 —UN—20MAR15
Antenna mount (A) is located in center of cab roof.
1. Remove dust cap from antenna base.
2. Remove brass nut from antenna base.
3. Discard rubber washer.
4. Reinstall antenna base with O-ring facing downward.
5. Install antenna.
NOTE: Remove cup holder to locate antenna cable Right-Hand Side Location / Rear Cornerpost Location (Right-Hand Rear)
and route though opening.
A—Antenna Mount B—Antenna Cable
Antenna cable (B) is located on right-hand side of cab
under armrest console.
IMPORTANT: Cornerpost cover must be removed shown. Use self-tapping screws or cap screws with nuts
before drilling. Be careful not to damage wiring to mount bracket.
harnesses and coolant hoses in locations shown NOTE: Certain broadcast bands may cause interference
when drilling holes or installing hardware. with the position receiver. Select a different
broadcast band or see your John Deere dealer if
Use bracket supplied by manufacturer as a template to signal losses are noticed with the position receiver.
locate and drill holes as required in various locations
OU90500,00003B7 -19-20MAR15-1/1
25-2 041717
PN=56
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
Armrest Console Controls
T8T543 —UN—04NOV14
1— Harvesting Functions (Crop 5— Low Engine Speed Switch 12— Contour Base Cutter Height 18— Side Windows Wiper
Divider, Base Cutter, Feed 6— Medium Engine Speed Switch Control Enable Switch Switches (If Equipped)
Rollers, and Chopper) Switch 7— High Engine Speed Switch 13— Configurable Encoder 19— Diagnostic Switch
2— Auxiliary Function Switch 8— Low Travel Speed Switch 14— Propulsion Encoder 20— Park Brake Switch
3— Positive Traction Engage 9— Medium Travel Speed Switch 15— Alarm and Operator Controls 21— Road Transport Disconnect
Switch (If Equipped) 10— High Travel Speed Switch (If Switch Switch
4— Automatic FieldCruise™ Equipped 16— Cooling Fan Reversing
Engage Switch 11— Floating Crop Dividers Switch
Enable Switch 17— Side Windows Washer
Switch (If Equipped)
30-1 041717
PN=57
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
T8T1558 —UN—06NOV14
scrolls, knockdown rollers, base cutter, feed rollers, and
chopper in forward or reverse rotation.
NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch (B) must be cycled
before harvesting functions engage.
If operator leaves seat for five seconds with harvesting 3. Push down and push forward on harvesting functions
functions engaged, presses harvesting functions quick switch.
stop switch, or turns off machine, harvesting functions and 4. Push down and push forward on auxiliary functions
auxiliary functions switches must be cycled. switch.
1. Push down and pull back on harvesting functions
switch (A) to middle position.
WM05597,0001145 -19-24NOV14-1/1
T8T1559 —UN—06NOV14
the following functions:
• Side Knives
• Primary Extractor
• Elevator
• Secondary Extractor
Push down and push forward on switch to enable auxiliary
functions.
A—Auxiliary Functions Switch
Push down and pull back on switch to disable auxiliary
functions.
WM05597,0001148 -19-24NOV14-1/1
30-2 041717
PN=58
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
T8T1658 —UN—25NOV14
speed—1500 rpm.
• High Engine Speed Switch (C) is for high speed—2210
rpm.
• Automatic FieldCruise™
1
Switch (D) is for high
speed—2000 rpm .
Indicator lights (E) indicate which switch is selected.
T8T538 —UN—25NOV14
range. Press desired switch to increase or decrease
machines ground speed.
• Low Travel Speed Switch (A) is for low machine travel
speed range.
• Medium
1
Travel Speed Switch (B) is for variable speed
range .
• High Travel Speed Switch (C) is for high machine speed
range. A—Low Travel Speed Switch C—High Travel Speed Switch
B—Medium Travel Speed
Selected travel speed is displayed on digital cornerpost Switch
display.
1
See Varitorque (Wheel Machines Only) in Greenstar 2630 Display
Screens section for more information.
WM05597,000119F -19-12JAN15-1/1
30-3 041717
PN=59
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
T8T538 —UN—25NOV14
range. Press desired switch to change machine travel
speed.
• Low Travel Speed Switch (A) is for loading harvester
on a truck for transport. Steering aggressiveness is
lowered in this speed.
• Medium Travel Speed Switch (B) is for low machine
speed range.
• High Travel Speed Switch (C) is for high machine speed A—Low Travel Speed Switch C—High Travel Speed Switch
range (if equipped). B—Medium Travel Speed (If Equipped)
Switch
Selected travel speed is displayed on corner post display.
WM05597,00013CD -19-28OCT15-1/1
T8T536 —UN—03JUN14
Park brake switch (A) manually or automatically engages
or disengages park brake preventing machine movement.
Automatic Mode:
• Press park brake switch once to set park brake to
automatic mode.
- If multi-function lever is in neutral gate and speed is
less than 1.5 km/h (1 mph), park brake is applied. If
multi-function lever is moved out of neutral gate, park A—Park Brake Switch
brake is released.
NOTE: Park brake engages each time multi-function lever - If multi-function lever is in neutral gate and speed is
is set to neutral position or if engine is shut OFF. less than 3.0 km/h (1.9 mph), park brake is applied.
If multi-function lever is moved out of neutral gate
Manual Engagement (Default Mode): or speed is greater than 1.5 km/h (1 mph) an alarm
sounds.
• Press park brake switch twice to set park brake to
manual mode.
WM05597,0000F89 -19-03JUN14-1/1
30-4 041717
PN=60
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
T8T1657 —UN—25NOV14
drive components.
WM05597,00013CB -19-28OCT15-1/1
T8T1554 —UN—25NOV14
ON. Road transport disconnect switch prevents the
following functions:
• Harvesting functions (base cutter, chopper, feed rollers,
crop divider scrolls)
• Auxiliary harvest functions (side knives, topper, elevator,
primary extractor fan, secondary extractor fan)
• Timed elevator swing
Brakes are applied together (wheel machines only). A—Road Transport Disconnect
Switch
When field operation is desired, press road transport
disconnect switch for two seconds to turn OFF transport
mode. Indicator light turns OFF.
WM05597,0001142 -19-20NOV14-1/1
Propulsion Encoder
Propulsion encoder (A) adjusts track steer bias (track
machines) or varitorque (wheel machines).
Turn encoder toward plus (+) to increase varitorque or
adjust track steer bias to right-hand side. Turn encoder
T8T1639 —UN—25NOV14
toward minus (-) to decrease varitorque or adjust track
steer bias to left-hand side.
A—Propulsion Encoder
WM05597,0001170 -19-24NOV14-1/1
30-5 041717
PN=61
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
T8T1566 —UN—12NOV14
reverse.
• Move multi-function lever to the center (C) to put
machine in neutral.
A—Forward C—Center
B—Back
WM05597,000117C -19-23JAN15-1/2
Switch Identification
T8T1900 —UN—23JAN15
T8T1901 —UN—23JAN15
A—Harvesting Functions Quick G—Elevator Swing Right Switch M—Base Cutter Raise Switch T— Left-Hand Crop Divider Lower
Stop Switch H—Elevator ON and OFF Switch N—Base Cutter Lower Switch Switch
B—AutoTrac™ Resume Switch I— Elevator Discharge Flap Out O—Topper Raise Switch U—Horn Switch
C—Configurable Switch 1 Switch P—Topper Lower Switch V—Configurable Switch A
D—Configurable Switch 2 J— Elevator Discharge Flap In Q—Right-Hand Crop Divider W—Configurable Switch B
E—Configurable Switch 3 Switch Raise Switch
F— Elevator Swing Left Switch K—Secondary Extractor Hood R—Right-Hand Crop Divider
Rotate Left Switch Lower Switch
L— Secondary Extractor Hood S—Left-Hand Crop Divider Raise
Rotate Right Switch Switch
30-6 041717
PN=62
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
T8T1723 —UN—02DEC14
A—Lever
WM05597,000117E -19-02DEC14-1/1
T8T1904 —UN—27JAN15
in this section.
A—Harvesting Functions
Quick Stop Switch
WM05597,000117D -19-27JAN15-1/1
30-7 041717
PN=63
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
CommandARM™ Controls
T8T3374 —UN—27OCT15
1— Left-Hand Topper Engage 9— Primary Extractor Engage 22— Left-Hand Side Knife Lower 32— Hazard Warning Lights
Switch Switch Switch Switch
2— Right-Hand Topper Engage 10— Secondary Extractor Engage 23— Right-Hand Side Knife Raise 33— Fan Speed Control Dial
Switch Switch (If Equipped) Switch 34— Defrost Switch
3— Left-Hand Side Knife Engage 11— Primary Extractor Hood 24— Right-Hand Side Knife 35— Air Conditioner Switch
Switch (If Equipped) Rotate Left Switch Lower Switch 36— Temperature Control Dial
4— Right-Hand Side Knife 12— Primary Extractor Hood 25— Elevator Reverse Switch 37— Push-To-Talk Switch (If
Engage Switch (If Equipped) Rotate Right Switch 26— Elevator Raise Switch Equipped)
5— Left-Hand Crop Divider Tilt 13— Confirm Switch 27— Elevator Lower Switch 38— Seek Forward Switch (If
Up Switch (If Equipped) 14— Cancel Switch 28— Topper Boom Light (If Equipped)
6— Right-Hand Crop Divider Tilt 15— Main Menu Switch European Conformity [CE] 39— Seek Reverse Switch (If
Up Switch (If Equipped) 16— Home Switch Lighting Is Not Equipped) Equipped)
7— Left-Hand Crop Divider Tilt 17— Selection Dial 29— Engine Compartment Lights 40— Volume Increase Switch (If
Down Switch (If Equipped) 18— A—J Shortcut Switches Switch/Topper Boom Light Equipped)
8— Right-Hand Crop Divider Tilt 19— Knockdown Roller Raise (If CE Lighting Is Equipped) 41— Volume Decrease Switch (If
Down Switch (If Equipped) Switch 30— Auxiliary Field Lights Switch Equipped)
20— Knockdown Roller Lower 31— Beacon Lights Switch 42— Mute Switch (If Equipped)
Switch
21— Left-Hand Side Knife Raise
Switch
30-8 041717
PN=64
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
T8T539 —UN—03JUN14
”application” that the CommandCenter display is
running. Items or applications, in the menu included:
- Sugarcane
- Message Center
- GreenStar
- Display
- Layout Manager
- Access Manager
- Video A—Selection Dial D—Main Menu Switch
B—Confirm Switch E—Home Switch
• Home Switch (E): allows operator to return to home C—Cancel Switch
page.
• Shortcut Switches (F): allows operator to select
corresponding softkey on GreenStar™ display.
GreenStar is a trademark of Deere & Company
WM05597,0000FA1 -19-12JAN15-1/1
Topper Switches
Press left-hand topper engage switch (A) to discharge
to left-hand side.
Press right-hand topper engage switch (B) to discharge to
right-hand side.
T8T1641 —UN—24NOV14
NOTE: Indicator light illuminates indicating which
direction topper is discharging.
WM05597,0001173 -19-24NOV14-1/1
30-9 041717
PN=65
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
T8T1642 —UN—24NOV14
B—Left-Hand Crop Divider Tilt D—Right-Hand Crop Divider
Down Switch Tilt Down Switch
WM05597,0001177 -19-24NOV14-1/1
T8T1646 —UN—24NOV14
T8T3375 —UN—27OCT15
A—Left-Hand Side Knife Engage C—Left-Hand Side Knife Raise E—Right-Hand Side Knife Lower
Switch Switch Switch
B—Right-Hand Side Knife D—Left-Hand Side Knife Lower F— Right-Hand Side Knife Raise
Engage Switch Switch Switch
NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch must be turned Press side knife raise or lower switch (C—F) to adjust
on to engage side knives. side knife to desired position.
Press left-hand or right-hand side knife engage switch (A
and B) to turn ON desired side knife.
WM05597,00013C8 -19-29OCT15-1/1
WM05597,0001175 -19-25NOV14-1/1
30-10 041717
PN=66
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
T8T1645 —UN—24NOV14
T8T1905 —UN—27JAN15
A—Secondary Extractor Engage B—Secondary Extractor Hood C—Secondary Extractor Hood
Switch Rotate Left Switch Rotate Right Switch
NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch must be turned on Press secondary extractor hood rotate left or right switch
to engage secondary extractor fan. (B and C) to rotate secondary extractor to desired position.
Press secondary extractor engage switch (A) to turn ON
secondary extractor fan.
WM05597,0001176 -19-27JAN15-1/1
T8T3376 —UN—27OCT15
A—Knockdown Roller Raise B—Knockdown Roller Lower
Switch Switch
WM05597,0001412 -19-18DEC15-1/1
30-11 041717
PN=67
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
Elevator Switches
T8T1653 —UN—25NOV14
T8T1906 —UN—27JAN15
A—Elevator Engage Switch C—Elevator Raise Switch E—Elevator Swing Left Switch
B—Elevator Reverse Switch D—Elevator Lower Switch F— Elevator Swing Right Switch
NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch must be turned on to IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Do NOT rotate
operate elevator in forward or reverse. elevator unless elevator is completely raised.
Press elevator engage switch (A) to turn elevator ON Press elevator swing left or right switch (E and F) to move
or OFF. Press and hold elevator reverse switch (B) to elevator to desired position.
operate elevator in reverse.
Press elevator raise or lower switch (C and D) to change
elevator to desired position.
WM05597,0001171 -19-27JAN15-1/1
30-12 041717
PN=68
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
H96249 —UN—30APR10
air flow throughout the cab.
H96250 —UN—30APR10
relation to desired fan speed adjusted setting.
Defrost
Defrost Switch (C): manually opens defrost vents.
NOTE: Indicator light illuminates when defrost is ON.
Air conditioner turns ON when defrost switch is
first pressed. This allows moisture to be removed
from the air and allows dry air to be blown on the Air Conditioner Icon (F): toggles icon on-off when air
windows. Press air conditioner switch to turn OFF. conditioner switch is pressed.
• Defrost helps remove moisture from air even in heat Temperature Control
mode.
Temperature Control Dial (G): adjusts temperature of
Defrost Indicator (D): toggles icon on-off when defrost cab. Turn dial to red zone to increase temperature and
switch is pressed. blue zone to decrease temperature.
30-13 041717
PN=69
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
Light Switches
NOTE: For more detailed information about lighting
locations on the machine, see Lights and
Signals section.
T8T540 —UN—03JUN14
Auxiliary Field Lights Switch (C):
Press switch to turn auxiliary field lights ON or OFF.
Beacon Lights Switch (D):
Press switch to turn beacon lights ON or OFF.
Hazard Warning Lights Switch (E):
Press switch to turn hazard warning lights and beacon
lights ON or OFF.
AS09261,00000B3 -19-11OCT16-1/1
H105408 —UN—11MAY12
Seek Forward Switch (B):
Volume Increase Switch (D): Press switch to mute audio. Press switch to resume play
of audio music.
Press switch to increase audio volume.
Volume Decrease Switch (E):
Press switch to decrease audio volume.
1
Switch is only available for Premium radios.
WM05597,0001390 -19-13AUG15-1/1
30-14 041717
PN=70
Lights and Signals
Light Switches
NOTE: Exit lights remain ON for 3 minutes after key
switch is turned OFF (if road or field lights were
used within the previous 5 minutes).
When all lights are first turned to the ON
H99531 —UN—22JUN11
position with key switch OFF, there will be a
slight delay before lights turn ON.
T8T541 —UN—03JUN14
high beams.
• Low beam position (G):
- Pull lever to middle position to operate low beams.
• High beam position (H):
- Push lever to lower position to activate high beam
headlights.
Armrest Light Switches
35-1 041717
PN=71
Lights and Signals
T8T1983 —UN—29JAN15
Park light switch (E) controls front turn signal and tail
lights (C and D).
Road light switch (F) controls two low beam cab head
lights (B).
Field light switch (G) controls eight cab headlights (A and
B). T8T1664 —UN—01DEC14
35-2 041717
PN=72
Lights and Signals
T8T4786 —UN—07SEP16
If the European conformity (CE) lighting package is not
equipped, the topper boom light (A) is controlled by lower
road light switch (B).
If the CE lighting package is equipped, the topper boom
light is controlled by engine compartment lights switch (C).
T8T4679 —UN—19AUG16
A—Topper Boom Light C—Engine Compartment
B—Lower Road Light Switch Lights Switch
AS09261,00000B7 -19-11OCT16-2/2
35-3 041717
PN=73
Lights and Signals
T8T1919 —UN—07MAY15
Cooling package and elevator auxiliary field lights (A and
B) are controlled by auxiliary field lights switch (E).
Engine compartment lights (C) are controlled by engine
compartment lights switch (D).
T8T1634 —UN—20NOV14
Field Lights Lights Switch
B—Elevator Auxiliary Field E—Auxiliary Field Lights
Lights Switch
C—Engine Compartment
Lights
WM05597,0000F5E -19-29JAN15-1/1
35-4 041717
PN=74
Lights and Signals
Turn Signals
NOTE: Turn signals operate anytime key switch is
ON. Turn signals are not self-cancelling, so lever
must be moved to neutral position.
H95266 —UN—22JUN11
signal lever (A) to indicate turns.
NOTE: Indicator lights (left or right) on cornerpost
illuminate and indicate a turn.
WM05597,0000DD4 -19-13JUN14-1/1
H94501 —UN—06AUG09
• ON (left)
• OFF (center)
• Automatic (right) (open cab door)
A—Light Switch B—Dome Light
WM05597,0000DD5 -19-28JAN14-1/1
Map Light
Map light provides overhead lighting for use at night or in
low light conditions.
Light switch (A) controls map light (B).
NOTE: Adjust map light as needed.
H96823 —UN—10JUN10
Light switch is a two-position switch:
• ON
• OFF
A—Light Switch B—Map Light
WM05597,0000DD6 -19-28JAN14-1/1
35-5 041717
PN=75
Digital Cornerpost Display
Upper Cornerpost Display
(A)—Left Turn Signal Indicator: shows operator that
a left turn is planned.
(B)—Stop Engine Warning Indicator (Red): illuminates
and requires machine be stopped at once and problem
corrected. Diagnostic trouble code is shown on armrest
display until the problem is resolved.
(C)—Service Warning Indicator (Yellow): illuminates
and flashes when a problem exists with machine.
Requires machine be stopped at the earliest convenience.
Diagnostic trouble code is shown on armrest display.
(D)—Information Warning Indicator (Blue): illuminates
and flashes when diagnostic trouble code is active. Alerts
operator to be aware of a condition. When warning is
acknowledged, screen message disappears and warning
indicator turns OFF.
(E)—Right Turn Signal Indicator: shows operator that a
T8140000065 —UN—06FEB14
right turn is planned.
(F)—Not Used
(G)—High Beam Indicator: shows operator that high
beam lights are currently selected.
(H)—Not Used
(I)—Engine Power Meter Indicator: shows operator
percentage of power that engine is using at any given time.
Indicator shows zero bars when fuel tank is empty.
IMPORTANT: If indicator moves into the red region,
engine power is maximized and machine If alarm sounds and engine temperature message
could potentially stall. Reduce load on the appears, stop engine and check problem immediately.
machine until indicator moves back into
green and yellow regions. (L)—Not Used
(M)—Transmission Gear or Range Indicator: “1” icon
• Green Region (35 to 100%) illuminates in forward.
• Yellow Region (101 to 110%)
• Red Region (111 to 114%) (N)—Park Brake Indicator: illuminates when park brake
is active.
(J)—Engine Temperature Indicator: 7—9 bars are
displayed for normal operating temperature. (O)—Neutral Indicator: shows that machine is in neutral
position.
• Green Region (64° to 99°C)
• Red Region (100° to 109°C) (P)—Engine Speed Indicator: shows engine rpm speed.
(K)—Fuel Gauge Indicator: shows how much fuel is left (Q)—Ground Speed Indicator: shows machine ground
in the tank. When level reaches 10% (approximately one speed (km/h or mph).
hour of operation) of remaining fuel, fuel indicator flashes,
alarm sounds and low fuel message appears.
AS09261,0000096 -19-08SEP16-1/1
40-1 041717
PN=76
Digital Cornerpost Display
T8120001764 —UN—03OCT12
AS09261,0000097 -19-12SEP16-1/1
40-2 041717
PN=77
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Armrest Display Navigation (GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display)
NOTE: Not every GreenStar™ 3 2630 softkey is
available for every model.
T8T557 —UN—12JUN14
use selection dial and press switch to:
- Select item
- Toggle between available selections within item
- Enter/Save values
• Cancel Switch (M): Press switch to cancel current
selection.
Shortcut Switch Method:
Shortcut switches (A—J) allow a one-touch selection of
desired input field or corresponding item on display.
• Shortcut Switches (A—J): Press to select
corresponding softkey on armrest display.
Touchscreen Method:
IMPORTANT: Under no circumstance should
touchscreen be contacted with an object harder
or sharper than a fingertip (pen, pencil point, or
any metal objects) that could cause damage to
T8T780 —UN—20JAN15
screen. Heavy pressure damages underlying
components and voids warranty. Light amounts
of pressure, if exerted continuously, can
degrade touchscreen reliability.
45-1 041717
PN=78
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Display Navigation
Sugar Main (A)
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control Setup (B)
Alarm and Operator Controls Setup (C)
Extractor Fan Setup (D)
Engine Setup (E)
Drivetrain Control Setup (F)
Elevator Setup (G)
T8T783 —UN—10JUL14
Harvester Activity Monitor (H)
WM05597,0001122 -19-17NOV14-1/1
45-2 041717
PN=79
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
K L
T8120001773 —UN—26OCT12
M N
45-3 041717
PN=80
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8130000047 —UN—21JAN13
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter
Height Control (X): allows operator to customize Floating
Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height Control
settings, if equipped. Icon will be green if Floating Crop
Dividers system is active and gray when off. If one side
is active and other is not, the corresponding part of the
icon will be green. W X
WM05597,0000FC7 -19-10JUL14-2/2
Sugarcane—Main Screen
Base cutter height (A), base cutter pressure (B), and
chopper pressure (C) are displayed in graphs.
T8T1880 —UN—04MAY15
WM05597,0001208 -19-21JAN15-1/1
45-4 041717
PN=81
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T1557 —UN—05NOV14
T8T2432 —UN—28APR15
Lower Region With Key On Lower Region With Engine On
A—Engine Hours E—Elevator Hours H—Contour Base Cutter Height M—Cooling Fan
B—Contour Base Cutter Height F— Automatic FieldCruise™ Control
Control Hours Hours I— Right-Hand Floating Crop
C—Harvesting Hours G—Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider
D—FieldCruise™ Hours Divider J— Primary Extractor
K—Elevator
L— Automatic FieldCruise™
45-5 041717
PN=82
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T3388 —UN—15DEC15
T8T644 —UN—03OCT14
Sugarcane Main Page 2 of 3
1. Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main 3. Select lower region settings softkey (C).
page 2 of 3 is displayed as shown.
2. Select harvester activity monitor softkey (B).
WM05597,00013FC -19-15DEC15-1/2
T8T2434 —UN—28APR15
T8T2942 —UN—01SEP15
A—Hour Meter Softkeys (3 used) D—AutoTrac™ Hours (Track F— FieldCruise™ Hours I— Transporting Hours
B—Contour Base Cutter Height Machines) G—Waiting Hours
Control Hours (If Equipped) E—Automatic FieldCruise™ H—Maneuvering Hours
C—Floating Crop Divider Hours Hours
(If Equipped)
4. Select hour meter softkey (A) you wish to replace. • Automatic FieldCruise™ Hours (C)
5. Select desired hour meter (B—G) to replace original.
• FieldCruise™ Hours (D)
Hour meters available:
• Waiting Hours (E)
• Maneuvering Hours (F)
• Contour Base Cutter Height Control Softkey (B) • Transporting Hours (G)
AutoTrac is a trademark of Deere & Company
FieldCruise is a trademark of Deere & Company
WM05597,00013FC -19-15DEC15-2/2
45-6 041717
PN=83
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T777 —UN—03OCT14
2. Select scroll up softkey (B) or scroll down softkey (C)
to locate desired machine setting softkey.
3. Select desired machine setting softkey to replace
original.
4. Detailed machine information may show any of the
following:
• Fuel consumed per hour Sugarcane Main Page 2 Of 3
• Engine intercooler temperature
• Optimal operating speed (rpm)
• Engine torque less accessory torque (%)
• Engine load at RPM (%)
• Accelerator pedal position (%)
• Calculated engine torque (%)
• Driver demanded engine torque
• Throttle position (%)
T8T779 —UN—03OCT14
• Engine derate request (seconds)
• Right rear wheel speed
• Left rear wheel speed
• Duty cycle of propulsion pump (%)
• Handle based drive position (%)
• Steering wheel angle (degree)
• Primary propulsion handle position (%) Sugarcane Main Page 3 Of 3
• Secondary propulsion handle position (%)
• Track machine steering bias position
• Elevator speed set point
• Extractor hydraulic pressure
• Extractor speed set point (rpm)
• Extractor smart mode set speed (rpm)
• Requested engine speed (rpm)
• Right base cutter position (%)
• Left base cutter position (%)
• Elevator drive motor speed (rpm)
T8T778 —UN—03OCT14
• Battery power input 1 (volts)
• Wheel based vehicle speed
• Rear feed speed (rpm)
• Rear feed pressure
• Engine intake air temperature
• Engine oil filter pressure
• Fuel delivery pressure
• Fuel temperature
• Engine coolant temperature A—Machine Setting Softkeys C—Scroll Down Softkey
• Left crop divider hydraulic pressure B—Scroll Up Softkey
• Right crop divider hydraulic pressure
• Left floating crop divider hydraulic pressure set point
• Right floating crop divider hydraulic pressure set point • Chopper speed (rpm)
• Left crop divider position (%) • Chopper hydraulic pressure
• Right crop divider position (%) • Base cutter hydraulic pressure
• Extractor fan speed (rpm) • Base cutter speed (rpm)
• Hydraulic oil temperature • Base cutter height set point (%)
• Fuel Level (%) • Base cutter position (%)
WM05597,0001123 -19-27APR15-1/1
45-7 041717
PN=84
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T1881 —UN—21JAN15
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base
Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
Set Point and Enable Settings (If Equipped)
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter
Height Control Setup Softkey (A)
Allows operator to access Floating Crop Dividers and
Contour Base Cutter Height Control settings.
Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider Settings (B)
Allows operator to change and view set point and enable
float for the left-hand crop divider.
Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider Increase and
T8T2943 —UN—01SEP15
Decrease Softkeys (C)
Allows operator to increase or decrease left-hand floating
crop divider set point. The softkey is backlit green and
allows the set point to be modified when conditions to
enable floating crop divider for the left-hand crop divider
have been satisfied and gray when conditions have not
been met.
NOTE: A single touch is slow advance. A touch cutter values are off, push and hold softkey for two sec.
and hold is quick advance. on consistent ground to calibrate and sync the target to
current position. If calibration is successful, a confirmation
Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider Set Point (D) alarm sounds. To calibrate, Floating Crop Dividers must
Displays set point for the left-hand floating crop divider. be active and machine must be moving forward. For more
information, see Calibrate System in Floating Crop Divider
NOTE: Each crop divider may be set to different set points. and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
section.
Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider On-Off (E)
Right-Hand Floating Crop Divider Settings (J)
Allows operator to enable floating option on the left-hand
crop divider. Allows operator to change and view set point and enable
float for the right-hand crop divider.
Contour Base Cutter Height Control Settings (F)
Right-Hand Floating Crop Divider Increase and
Allows operator to change, view, and capture target height Decrease Softkeys (K)
set point for contour base cutter height control.
Allows operator to increase or decrease right-hand
Contour Base Cutter Height Control Increase and floating crop divider set point. The softkey is backlit green
Decrease Softkeys (G) and allows the set point to be modified when conditions to
enable floating crop divider for the right-hand crop divider
Allows operator to increase or decrease base cutter have been satisfied and gray when conditions have not
position set point. The softkey is backlit green and allows been met.
the set point to be modified when conditions to enable
the contour base cutter height control system have been NOTE: A single touch is slow advance. A touch
satisfied and gray when conditions have not been met. and hold is quick advance.
NOTE: A single touch is slow advance. A touch Right-Hand Floating Crop Divider Set Point (L)
and hold is quick advance.
Displays set point for the right-hand floating crop divider.
Contour Base Cutter Height Control Set Point (H)
NOTE: Each crop divider may be set to different set points.
Displays set point for contour base cutter height control
position. Right-Hand Floating Crop Divider On-Off (M)
Contour Base Cutter Height Control Target Capture (I) Allows operator to enable floating option on the right-hand
crop divider.
Allows the operator to capture and store the current base
cutter height as the new set point for the contour base Activate All Softkey (N)
cutter height control system. If desired and actual base
45-8 041717
PN=85
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Allows the operator to activate the floating crop divider End of Row Setup Softkey (P)
and contour base cutter control height control systems
with the touch of a button when all enabling conditions Allows operator to access end of the row settings for
have been met. Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control.
Floating Crop Divider Reset Softkey (O)
Resets floating crop divider pressure percentage to 50%.
AS09261,0000168 -19-18NOV16-2/4
T8T2945 —UN—01SEP15
End of Row Setup (If Equipped)
End of Row Setup Softkey (A)
Allows operator to access end of the row settings for
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control.
Left-Hand Crop Divider End of Row Enable (B)
Allows operator to enable left-hand crop divider end of
the row option.
Left-Hand Crop Divider End of Row Set Point Capture
T8T2944 —UN—01SEP15
Softkey (C)
Allows operator to touch and hold softkey to change
left-hand crop divider end of the row set point to current
position.
Contour Base Cutter End of Row Enable (D)
Allows operator to enable base cutter end of the row
option.
Allows operator to enable base cutter return to cut option.
Contour Base Cutter End of Row Set Point Capture
Softkey (E) This target is identical to base cutter set point displayed
on cornerpost display.
Allows operator to touch and hold softkey to change base
cutter end of the row set point to current position. End of Row Set Point Capture All Softkey (I)
Right-Hand Crop Divider End of Row Enable (F) Allows operator to touch and hold softkey to change base
cutter and left-hand and right-hand crop dividers end of
Allows operator to enable right-hand crop divider end of
the row set point to current position.
the row option.
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter
Right-Hand Crop Divider End of Row Set Point
Height Control Setup Softkey (J)
Capture Softkey (G)
Allows operator to return to Floating Crop Dividers and
Allows operator to touch and hold softkey to change
Contour Base Cutter Height Control settings.
right-hand crop divider end of the row set point to current
position. Advanced Setup (K)
Contour Base Cutter Return to Cut Enable (H) Allows operator to access sensitivity settings for Floating
Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height Control.
NOTE: This must be checked for Contour Base
Cutter Height Control to work.
Continued on next page AS09261,0000168 -19-18NOV16-3/4
45-9 041717
PN=86
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T5042 —UN—18NOV16
Allow operator to enable (checkmark) or disable (no
checkmark) resume function of floating crop dividers after
they have been manually raised. Crop divider will resume
float function after five sec. when enabled.
Floating Crop Dividers Sensitivity Meter (B)
Displays sensitivity for right-hand and left-hand floating
crop dividers.
Floating Crop Dividers Sensitivity Decrease Softkey NOTE: Default time is 5 sec.
(C)
Base Cutter Position Resume Timer Decrease Softkey
Allows operator to decrease floating crop dividers (J)
sensitivity.
Allows operator to decrease time before system
Floating Crop Dividers Sensitivity Increase Softkey (D) reacquires target position.
Allows operator to increase floating crop dividers Base Cutter Position Resume Timer Increase Softkey
sensitivity. (K)
Base Cutter Pressure Target Range Enable Box (E) Allows operator to increase time before system reacquires
Allows operator to enable (checkmark) or disable (no target position.
checkmark) base cutter pressure target range. Contour Contour Base Cutter Height Sensitivity Meter (L)
base cutter height control system operates off position
only when disabled. Displays base cutter height sensitivity to changes in the
position of floating crop dividers.
Base Cutter Pressure Resume Timer Meter (F)
Contour Base Cutter Height Sensitivity Decrease
Displays time in seconds before system attempts to Softkey (M)
reacquire target position when enabled. Adjustable 5—15
sec. Allows operator to decrease base cutter height sensitivity.
NOTE: Default time is 10 sec. Contour Base Cutter Height Sensitivity Increase
Softkey (N)
Base Cutter Pressure Resume Timer Decrease
Softkey (G) Allows operator to increase base cutter height sensitivity.
Allows operator to decrease time before system attempts Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter
to reacquire target position. Height Control Setup Softkey (O)
Base Cutter Pressure Resume Timer Increase Softkey Allows operator to return to Floating Crop Dividers and
(H) Contour Base Cutter Height Control settings.
Allows operator to increase time before system attempts Information Softkey (P)
to reacquire target position. Allows operator to access additional information for
Base Cutter Position Resume Timer Meter (I) desired setting.
Displays time in seconds before base cutter will reacquire Advanced Setup Reset Softkey (Q)
target position after being manually raised or lowered. Resets advanced settings to defaults.
Adjustable 2—8 sec.
AS09261,0000168 -19-18NOV16-4/4
45-10 041717
PN=87
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T784 —UN—03OCT14
Controls Setup Softkey
WM05597,000139D -19-31AUG15-1/4
T8T1885 —UN—21JAN15
• Floating Crop Divider Float
• Left-hand Crop Divider Float
• Right-hand Crop Divider Float
• Base Cutter End of Row
• Crop Divider End of Row
• Base Cutter Target Height Up Indicator
• Base Cutter Target Height Down Indicator
• Topper Discharge Direction Toggle
• Manual Fan Reversal • Base Cutter Height Set Point
• App Toggle • Base Cutter Pressure Set Point
• Primary Hood Rotate Counterclockwise • Elevator Speed Set Point
• Primary Hood Rotate Clockwise
• Track Steer Bias Toggle Alarm Setup Softkey (H)
• All End of row Allows operator to access alarm setup page.
• Base Cutter Set Point Capture
P1 Dial (G) Page Timeout Settings Softkey (I)
P1 dial is assignable to control: Allows operator to access page timeout settings page.
45-11 041717
PN=88
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T1886 —UN—21JAN15
Chopper High-Pressure Alarm Frequency (C)
Allows operator to set frequency before alarm sounds
when chopper high-pressure set point is exceeded.
Base Cutter High-Pressure Alarm Enable (D)
Allows operator to enable base cutter high-pressure alarm.
Base Cutter High-Pressure Set Point (E)
Operator Controls Setup Softkey (G)
Allows operator to set base cutter high-pressure alarm
Allows operator to access operator controls setup page.
set point.
Base Cutter High-Pressure Alarm Frequency (F)
Allows operator to set frequency before alarm sounds
when base cutter high-pressure set point is exceeded.
WM05597,000139D -19-31AUG15-3/4
T8T787 —UN—11JUL14
• Drivetrain Control
• Elevator
• Engine
• Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control
• End of Row
• Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control Sensitivity
• Maximum Harvester Speed
• Operator Controls
• Harvester Activity Monitor
• Alarms
Select enable box (B) for desired page (A) to enable
desired page timeout set point (C).
Select enable all box (D) to enable or disable all page T8T788 —UN—28APR15
timeouts.
WM05597,000139D -19-31AUG15-4/4
45-12 041717
PN=89
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T2939 —UN—01SEP15
T8T672 —UN—03OCT14
Sugarcane Main Page 2 Of 3
Primary extractor fan speed is maintained regardless of
engine rpm or hydraulic oil temperature when set within
normal operating range (600—900 rpm).
Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main page
2 of 3 is displayed as shown.
T8T2940 —UN—01SEP15
Select primary extractor softkey (B).
Select fan speed graph (C) and touch corresponding
plus (+) or minus (-) softkeys to increase or decrease fan
speed rpm set point (D). Fan speed may also be adjusted
by selecting increase fan speed softkey (I) or decrease
fan speed softkey (J).
NOTE: A single select is slow advance. A select
and hold is quick advance. A—Sugar Main Softkey H—Low End Fan Speed Limit
B—Primary Extractor Softkey I— Increase Fan Speed Softkey
Select high end fan speed limit softkey (E) and touch C—Graph J— Decrease Fan Speed
corresponding plus (+) or minus (-) softkey to increase or D—Fan Speed rpm Set Point Softkey
E—High End Fan Speed Limit K—Checkbox
decrease high end fan speed limit (F). Softkey L— Smart Power Mode Set
F— High End Fan Speed Limit Point
Select low end fan speed limit softkey (G) and touch G—Low End Fan Speed Limit M—Checkbox
corresponding plus (+) or minus (-) softkey to increase or Softkey
decrease low end fan speed limit (H).
Select smart mode enable checkbox (K) to allow primary
speed to lower to set point when elevator is turned off. Select checkbox (M) to enable elevator swing/hood
Select smart mode set point (L) to adjust smart power synchronization.
mode rpm.
AS09261,00000AD -19-12SEP16-1/1
45-13 041717
PN=90
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T671 —UN—03OCT14
T8T4785 —UN—07SEP16
Sugarcane Main Page 2 Of 3
T8T2806 —UN—16JUN15
page 2 of 3 is displayed as shown.
2. Select engine information softkey (B).
3. Select checkbox (C) to enable Automatic
FieldCruise™.
4. Select checkbox (D) to enable Manual FieldCruise™.
NOTE: Set point is modified by selecting (+) or
A—Sugar Main Softkey E—Manual FieldCruise™ Set
(-) softkey on screen. B—Engine Information Softkey Point
C—Checkbox F— Mid Idle Set Point
5. Select Manual FieldCruise™ set point (E) to modify. D—Checkbox G—Engine Speed Switches (3
used)
6. Select mid idle set point (F) to modify. H—Not Used
45-14 041717
PN=91
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Auto Idle
T8T671 —UN—03OCT14
T8T4784 —UN—07SEP16
Sugarcane Main Page 2 Of 3
1. Select the sugar main softkey (A) until the sugar cane
main page 2/3 is displayed as shown.
2. Select the engine information softkey (B).
3. Select the enable auto idle softkey (C). Checkmark
T8T4626 —UN—10AUG16
appears when activated.
4. Select the auto idle timer softkey (D).
5. The numerical keypad is displayed. Select the auto
idle activation time in seconds from the numeric
softkeys (E).
NOTE: Selectable range is 0--200 s.
6. If an incorrect number is entered, use the delete A—Sugar Main Softkey E—Numeric Softkey
softkey (F) to delete the selection. B—Engine Information Softkey F— Delete Softkey
C—Enable Auto Idle Softkey G—Accept Softkey
7. When the correct value is entered, press the accept D—Auto Idle Timer Softkey
softkey (G).
NOTE: When machine is in neutral or the parking 8. The screen returns to the engine configuration screen,
brake is engaged, the engine will enter a low and the auto idle selected value is displayed.
idle after the specified dwell time.
NOTE: Settings can be locked to avoid any
When the parking brake is disengaged and the alterations by the operator.
multi-function lever moved to the forward or
reverse position, the engine rpm is automatically
increased to previous speed.
AS09261,00000C8 -19-17OCT16-2/2
45-15 041717
PN=92
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T674 —UN—03OCT14
T8T675 —UN—04MAY15
Sugarcane Main Page 2 Of 3
Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main page
2 of 3 is displayed as shown.
Select drivetrain control softkey (B).
Select maximum harvester speed setup softkey (C).
Select checkbox (D) to activate or deactivate maximum
harvester speed. Checkmark appears when activated.
Select maximum harvesting speed (E) to set maximum
T8T4677 —UN—18AUG16
ground speed when base cutter is active.
NOTE: The truck loading mode discards the
aggressiveness settings and uses its own value
for less aggressive steering.
45-16 041717
PN=93
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T674 —UN—03OCT14
T8T677 —UN—04MAY15
Sugarcane Main Page 2 Of 3
T8T1569 —UN—25NOV14
represented as a graph (E) and a number.
NOTE: Negative numbers indicate left steer bias. Positive
numbers indicate right steer bias.
A single select is slow advance. A select
and hold is quick advance.
45-17 041717
PN=94
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T1534 —UN—27OCT14
T8T1535 —UN—04MAY15
NOTE: Machine must be in medium travel speed
to use varitorque adjustment.
T8T1561 —UN—25NOV14
3. Select varitorque graph (C) and touch corresponding
plus (+) or minus (-) softkey to increase or decrease
varitorque percentage.
NOTE: Varitorque may also be adjusted by propulsion
encoder (D) on armrest or selecting decrease or
increase varitorque percentage softkey (E or F).
A single select is slow advance. A select A—Sugar Main Softkey D—Propulsion Encoder
and hold is quick advance. B—Drivetrain Control Softkey E—Decrease Varitorque
C—Varitorque Graph Percentage Softkey
F— Increase Varitorque
Percentage Softkey
WM05597,00010E8 -19-04MAY15-1/1
45-18 041717
PN=95
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Elevator Screen
T8T1301 —UN—03OCT14
T8T2941 —UN—01SEP15
Sugarcane Main Page 2 Of 3
A—Sugar Main Softkey D—Elevator Swing Control Offset G—Reduced Elevator Speed I— Increase Elevator Speed
B—Elevator Setup Softkey E—Checkbox Graph Softkey
C—Checkbox F— Checkbox H—Decrease Elevator Speed
Softkey
Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main page To perform an elevator swing:
2 of 3 is displayed as shown.
Select elevator setup softkey (B) to access setup page.
• Base cutter must be engaged in forward direction.
• Checkbox (C) must be marked.
• Press desired elevator swing switch on multi-function
lever twice (double-click) to perform an elevator swing.
Elevator Swing Control
Select check box (C) to enable elevator swing control.
Reduced Elevator Speed Mode (If Equipped)
Select elevator swing control offset (D) to adjust the
default elevator swing control. Select checkbox (F) to activate reduced elevator speed
mode.
• The default elevator swing control is approximately 1/4
of a turn. Select reduced elevator speed graph (G) to adjust
• The elevator swing control offset may be adjusted (+) or elevator speed.
(-) by selecting the corresponding softkey. NOTE: Elevator speed is modified by selecting plus (+) or
Adjusting the offset with the (+) softkey increases minus (-) softkey on screen or selecting decrease
distance the elevator swings. Adjusting the offset with or increase elevator speed softkey (H or I).
the (-) softkey decreases distance the elevator swings.
A single select is slow advance. A select
NOTE: Elevator swing control has a range of -3.0—3.0. and hold is quick advance.
Select checkbox (E) to enable an audible alert when
elevator swing control is occurring.
WM05597,000139F -19-01SEP15-1/1
45-19 041717
PN=96
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T644 —UN—03OCT14
Softkey
WM05597,00013F4 -19-15DEC15-1/2
T8T3389 —UN—15DEC15
• Road Travel (H)
• Waiting (I)
Elevator hours (J) are also displayed on this page.
Hours since last reset (C) and distance since last reset
(D) is cleared by selecting and holding reset softkey (K)
for two sec.
NOTE: Harvester activity monitor logs data to a
universal serial bus (USB) drive as long as A—Accumulated Hours G—Headland Maneuver
B—Accumulated Distance H—Road Travel
it is connected to USB port. C—Hours since last reset I— Waiting
D—Distance since last reset J— Elevator Hours
E—Harvester Engine Hours K—Reset Softkey
F— Harvesting
Type Conditions
E Harvester Engine Hours • Engine On
• Base Cutter On
F Harvesting • Base Cutter Pressure greater than low-pressure limit
• Vehicle speed greater than 0.2 km/h (0.124 mph)
• Base Cutter On
G Headland Maneuvera • Base Cutter Pressure less than low-pressure limit
• Vehicle speed greater than 0.2 km/h (0.124 mph)
• Base Cutter OFF
H Road Travel
• Vehicle speed greater than 0.2 km/h (0.124 mph)
I Waiting Harvester - (Harvesting + Headland Maneuver + Road Travel)
a
If harvesting functions switch is disengaged or harvesting functions quick stop switch is pressed, this time is counted toward road travel.
WM05597,00013F4 -19-15DEC15-2/2
45-20 041717
PN=97
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Shift Configuration
T8T3390 —UN—15DEC15
T8T644 —UN—03OCT14
Sugarcane Main Page 2 of 3
Harvester activity monitor data is split by start of day and Select harvester activity monitor softkey (B).
shift times.
Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main page
2 of 3 is displayed as shown.
AS09261,000016E -19-21NOV16-1/2
T8T3521 —UN—15DEC15
Set start of day time (A) to desired setting. Logged data Current time (D) is indicated on shift graph (E). Shift graph
is split at start of day time. represents selected shift times.
Select checkbox (B) to enable shift logging for desired shift Select harvester activity monitor softkey (F) to return to
or shifts. Set appropriate shift times (C) for desired shifts. harvester activity monitor page.
AS09261,000016E -19-21NOV16-2/2
45-21 041717
PN=98
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T5046 —UN—21NOV16
T8T5047 —UN—21NOV16
A—Row Width Adjustment B—Numeric Softkey D—Accept Softkey
Softkey C—Delete Softkey
1. Select the row width adjustment softkey (A). 4. When the correct value is entered, press the accept
2. The numerical keypad is displayed. Select the row softkey (D).
width in meters from the numeric softkeys (B).
3. If an incorrect number is entered, use the delete
softkey (C) to delete the selection.
AS09261,0000171 -19-30NOV16-1/1
45-22 041717
PN=99
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T1879 —UN—16JAN15
.csv file that opens in a spreadsheet.
• When key is cycled, it makes a new line
of data in the .csv file.
• If USB drive is not connected when the machine
is started, then the data log is one set of data
when USB drive is connected.
45-23 041717
PN=100
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T2555 —UN—18MAY15
T8T2556 —UN—18MAY15
T8T2557 —UN—18MAY15
T8T2558 —UN—18MAY15
2. Select export data softkey (A).
3. Select a current profile (B) or create a new profile (C).
4. If applicable, use on-screen keyboard to type a profile
name and select accept softkey (D).
5. Select begin transfer softkey (E). Select accept softkey
(F).
T8T2559 —UN—18MAY15
B—Current Profile E—Begin Transfer Softkey
C—New Profile F— Accept Softkey
WM05597,00013F5 -19-09DEC15-2/2
45-24 041717
PN=101
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Diagnostics
T8T641 —UN—19JUN14
T8T678 —UN—08JUL14
Diagnostic Readings Page
1. Select diagnostics switch (A) to reach diagnostic
readings page.
2. Select calibration softkey (B) to reach calibrations
page.
3. Select diagnostics softkey (C) to return to diagnostic
readings page.
T8T679 —UN—08JUL14
Calibrations Page
WM05597,000112B -19-14NOV14-1/1
Diagnostics—Readings
1. Select diagnostic category selection (A) to choose
what readings to view.
2. Select accept softkey (B) to display readings.
WM05597,000112C -19-14NOV14-1/1
45-25 041717
PN=102
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Diagnostics—Calibrations
NOTE: Calibrations are done using instructions
shown on screen. Operator selects which
calibration and highlights calibrate softkey, and
is guided through procedure.
T8T751 —UN—08JUL14
A—Calibration Category B—Accept Softkey
Selection
WM05597,000112D -19-14NOV14-1/1
Display
Settings Softkey
Select main menu softkey. Select display settings softkey.
Continued on next page WM05597,00013FB -19-14DEC15-1/4
45-26 041717
PN=103
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Brightness Level:
T8T752 —UN—08JUL14
T8T753 —UN—08JUL14
A—Bar Graph D—Day/Night Softkey F— Checkbox J— Enter/Accept Softkey
B—Decrease Softkey E—Advanced Backlighting G—Decrease Softkey
C—Increase Softkey Settings Softkey H—Increase Softkey
I— Cancel Softkey
Allows operator to control brightness level of screen. Select advanced backlighting settings softkey (E) to
Brightness is displayed on bar graph (A). advance to next screen.
Select decrease softkey (B) or increase softkey (C) to Select checkbox (F) to toggle synchronization with cab
select brightness level of screen. backlighting.
• Increase brightness bar graph to brighten screen. • Checked—synchronizes screen and cab backlighting
• Decrease brightness bar graph to darken screen. together.
• Unchecked—screen and cab backlighting work
Day/Night Settings: independently from each other.
NOTE: Day/Night softkey only appears in Select decrease softkey (G) or increase softkey (H) to
standalone mode. select balance level of screen.
Allows operator to toggle between day or night settings. • Increase bar graph to brighten backlighting.
• Decrease bar graph to darken backlighting.
Select day/night softkey (D) to toggle between day or
night settings. NOTE: Select cancel softkey (I) to clear balance levels.
Sync With Cab/Standalone Modes: Select enter/accept softkey (J) to return to previous screen.
45-27 041717
PN=104
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T754 —UN—08JUL14
WM05597,00013FB -19-14DEC15-3/4
T8T755 —UN—08JUL14
Box displays a checkmark indicating which color was
selected.
WM05597,00013FB -19-14DEC15-4/4
Display
Settings Softkey
Select main menu softkey. Select display settings softkey.
Continued on next page WM05597,000112F -19-06JAN15-1/4
45-28 041717
PN=105
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T756 —UN—08JUL14
A—Settings Softkey D—Language Menu
B—Regional Settings Tab E—Numeric Format Menu
C—Country Menu F— Units Menu
WM05597,000112F -19-06JAN15-2/4
T8T757 —UN—08JUL14
Select desired menu:
• Date Menu (C)
• Date Format Menu (D)
• Time Menu (E)
• 24 Hour Box (F)
• Daylight Savings Time Box (G)
• Greenwich Mean Time Offset (H)
• Local Offset (I) A—Settings Softkey F— 24 Hour Box
• GPS Time Sync Box(J) B—Time/Date Tab G—Daylight Savings Time Box
C—Date Menu (Month, Day, H—GMT (Greenwich Mean
NOTE: Year) Time) Offset
D—Date Format Menu I— Local Offset
• Checked—time is displayed as military E—Time Menu (Hours, Minutes, J— GPS Time Sync Box
time (24 hour clock). and a.m or p.m.)
• Unchecked—time is displayed in standard
time (12 hour clock).
Continued on next page WM05597,000112F -19-06JAN15-3/4
45-29 041717
PN=106
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T758 —UN—08JUL14
• Pressure Menu (H)
• Force Menu (I)
Select desired choice from menu.
WM05597,000112F -19-06JAN15-4/4
Display
Settings Softkey
Select main menu softkey. Select display settings softkey.
WM05597,0001130 -19-14NOV14-1/4
Diagnostic Readings:
Select diagnostics softkey (A) and readings tab (B).
Screen displays the following:
• Unswitched Voltage
• Switched Voltage
• CAN High Voltage (Vehicle Bus)
• CAN High Voltage (Implement Bus)
• CAN Low Voltage (Vehicle Bus)
• CAN Low Voltage (Implement Bus) T8T759 —UN—09JUL14
45-30 041717
PN=107
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
About Menu:
Select diagnostics softkey (A) and about tab (B).
Screen displays the following:
• Copyright Information
• Software and Hardware Information
- Hardware Part Number
- Hardware Serial Number
- Software Part Number
T8T760 —UN—09JUL14
- Software Version Number
- Application Build Number
WM05597,0001130 -19-14NOV14-3/4
Display Tests:
Select diagnostics softkey (A) and tests tab (B).
Display Color Test:
Select color test softkey (C).
• Display tests color of screen (diagram appears with red,
blue, and green).
• If you do not see test colors, see your John Deere dealer.
T8T761 —UN—09JUL14
Touchscreen Test:
Select touchscreen test softkey (D).
• Test allows operator to identify pixel problems on screen.
a. When screen is touched a sighting target appears on
area touched.
b. Continue to touch screen around area of suspected
pixel malfunction and see if sighting target appears.
A—Diagnostics Softkey D—Touchscreen Test Softkey
c. If sighting target does not appear, see your John B—Tests Tab E—Touchscreen Calibration
Deere dealer. C—Color Test Softkey Softkey
Touchscreen Calibration:
Select touchscreen calibration softkey (E). NOTE: Touchscreen calibration cancels any saved
1. Another screen appears with an X in upper right corner. calibrations and allows operator to start over
2. Press screen at X and continue to follow Xs around and perform a new calibration.
screen. Always press screen directly at center of X.
WM05597,0001130 -19-14NOV14-4/4
45-31 041717
PN=108
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
45-32 041717
PN=109
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T762 —UN—09JUL14
information on both displays at the same time.
T8T4651 —UN—12AUG16
Trouble Code Menu in Diagnostic Trouble Codes Section
for further information).
Electronic Control Unit Information (ECU) Softkey (D):
Select electronic control unit information softkey.
Allows operator to view control units, addresses, message
counts, control unit part numbers and serial numbers,
software part numbers and versions (see your John Deere
Dealer). Notification Pop-Ups (F):
CAN Bus Information Softkey (E): Notifications are information Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC) that will popup at the bottom of the screen without
Select CAN bus information softkey. covering the entire page.
Allows operator to view if network status is active or Notifications can be manually acknowledged by pressing
not active, total message counts, and CAN high or low accept softkey (G) on the notification popup.
voltages (see your John Deere Dealer).
GreenStar is a trademark of Deere & Company
AS09261,00000AE -19-11OCT16-2/2
45-33 041717
PN=110
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Layout Manager
Application Softkey
Select main menu softkey. Select layout manager softkey.
WM05597,0001132 -19-17NOV14-1/2
T8T763 —UN—09JUL14
• Page 5
Select desired home page.
Select desired home page layout (B).
Select desired area from home page region (C).
Choose desired home page area from available options.
A—Region Menu D—Include in Home Page
Select include in home page collection box (D). B—Home Page Layouts Collection Box
C—Home Page Region E—Cancel Softkey
• Checked - selected home page is included in home F— Accept Softkey
page cycle.
• Unchecked - selected home page is not included in
home page cycle. Select cancel softkey (E) to cancel layout manager setup.
NOTE: Select home softkey on any screen to cycle Select accept softkey (F) to accept layout manager setup.
through selected home pages.
WM05597,0001132 -19-17NOV14-2/2
Access Manager
Application Softkey
Select main menu softkey. Select layout manager softkey.
Continued on next page WM05597,0001133 -19-23FEB15-1/4
45-34 041717
PN=111
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
T8T766 —UN—09JUL14
• Owner Mode - determines which changes/adjustments
are made available to operators.
Select desired access level.
Change Password:
Allows owner of machine to set password preventing
operator from making changes/adjustments previously
set by owner.
NOTE: If password is lost or forgotten, see your John
Deere dealer for further information.
T8T767 —UN—09JUL14
NOTE: Select back arrow softkey (E) to delete
digits if a mistake is made.
Select cancel softkey (F) to cancel and return
to previous screen.
45-35 041717
PN=112
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Lock/Unlock Applications:
Allows owner the ability to lock or unlock certain features.
When locked only certain features are made visible to
operator.
Select up or down arrow softkey (A) to scroll through
different applications:
• GreenStar
• Performance Monitor
• Sugarcane
• Display
• Layout Manager
Select desired application (B).
T8T768 —UN—09JUL14
Softkeys
T8T770 —UN—09JUL14
A—Up and Down Arrow Softkeys C—Minus Softkey E—Cancel Softkey
B—Plus Softkey D—Lock and Unlock Softkey F— Accept Softkey
45-36 041717
PN=113
Operating the Engine
Avoid Hot Exhaust
Servicing machine or attachments with engine running
can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and
skin contact with hot exhaust gases and components.
Exhaust parts and streams become very hot during
RG17488 —UN—21AUG09
operation. Exhaust gases and components reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people, ignite, or melt
common materials.
DX,EXHAUST -19-20AUG09-1/1
T8T2430 —UN—24APR15
1. Open latch (A) to release engine compartment door
(B).
2. Open door, pull door lock (C) upwards, and swing lock
into hole in door.
WM05597,0001399 -19-27AUG15-1/1
T8T1990 —UN—03FEB15
is stored longer than 25 days. If storage period
is longer than 90 days, remove negative lead to
batteries to minimize load to batteries.
WM05597,00013AF -19-10SEP15-1/1
50-1 041717
PN=114
Operating the Engine
50-2 041717
PN=115
Operating the Engine
TS204 —UN—15APR13
A compatible 12V battery or battery charger (A) can be
connected in parallel with existing battery (B) on machine
to assist in weak battery or cold weather starting.
ALWAYS use heavy duty jumper cables.
T8120000495 —UN—20FEB12
and connect away from battery. ALWAYS
disconnect NEGATIVE (-) cable first, and
disconnect from weak battery first.
Cold Weather Warm-Up 2. Engage all harvesting functions and increase engine
Do not attempt harvester operations until hydraulic speed to half throttle (1500 rpm). Run engine at
functions move at close-to-normal cycle times. half throttle until engine is at operating temperature
(between 77° C [170° F] and 95° C [203° F]).
In extremely cold conditions, an extended warm-up period
will be necessary. 3. Depress switch to full engine speed. Begin operation
when harvesting functions are running at normal
Avoid sudden operation of hydraulic functions until engine speeds.
is thoroughly warm.
1. After starting engine, run at idle for 5 minutes.
JR07957,0000283 -19-18FEB13-1/1
50-3 041717
PN=116
Operating the Engine
3. Lower front mounted equipment. 7. To avoid damage to turbocharger, run engine at idle
without load for 3—5 minutes before stopping. Shut
4. Lower elevator if machine is parked for repairs, OFF engine and remove key.
servicing, or end of harvest day.
WM05597,000108E -19-23JAN15-1/1
50-4 041717
PN=117
Driving the Harvester
Driving or Transporting the Harvester on passengers are allowed on the platform
Public Roads areas of the machine.
Before driving on public roads, check local laws and Observe all safe driving rules:
regulations that apply to agricultural equipment. Additional
lights, mirrors, slow moving vehicle emblems, or reflectors 1. Keep crop dividers in raised position.
may be required. 2. Keep topper out of operator’s line of sight.
3. Be aware of elevator and topper heights around
ALWAYS use headlights and hazard warning lights, even overhead structures.
during the day. 4. Only use driving lights when on public roads.
5. Slow down before turning.
CAUTION: Be cautious of any low power lines 6. Avoid rapid steering and braking.
while driving the harvester. Always be aware 7. Slowly stop vehicle with a flat tire.
of the harvester and elevator height. 8. Watch out for bystanders and obstacles.
9. Look behind the harvester before backing up.
Never allow passengers other than the operator 10. Be cautious when driving up or down steep inclines.
and trainee to be in the harvester and no
WM05597,000119D -19-12JAN15-1/1
Travel Speeds
TYPE Km/h mph
Tracka 9 5.6
Wheela 24.6 15.3
a
Maximum speed is dependent on tire and/or hydraulic system option.
WM05597,0000E34 -19-12FEB14-1/1
T8T1566 —UN—12NOV14
1. Raise harvester to level, raise crop dividers, and lower
topper and elevator below height of cab.
2. Switch the park brake switch to OFF position.
3. Move multi-function lever forward (A) to move
harvester forward.
4. Pull multi-function lever back (B) to move harvester in
reverse.
5. Move multi-function lever to the center (C) to put
machine in neutral.
A—Forward C—Center
B—Back
WM05597,0000EA8 -19-26NOV14-1/1
55-1 041717
PN=118
Driving the Harvester
T8T536 —UN—03JUN14
Park brake switch (A) manually or automatically engages
or disengages park brake preventing machine movement.
Automatic Mode:
• Press park brake switch once to set park brake to
automatic mode.
- If multi-function lever is in neutral gate and speed is
less than 1.5 km/h (1 mph), park brake is applied. If
multi-function lever is moved out of neutral gate, park A—Park Brake Switch
brake is released.
NOTE: Park brake engages each time multi-function lever - If multi-function lever is in neutral gate and speed is
is set to neutral position or if engine is shut OFF. less than 3.0 km/h (1.9 mph), park brake is applied.
If multi-function lever is moved out of neutral gate
Manual Engagement (Default Mode): or speed is greater than 1.5 km/h (1 mph) an alarm
sounds.
• Press park brake switch twice to set park brake to
manual mode.
WM05597,0000F89 -19-03JUN14-1/1
55-2 041717
PN=119
Driving the Harvester
T8T1119 —UN—15SEP14
1. Stop harvester on level surface. 6. Run engine at idle speed without load for 3 to 5 minutes
2. Completely lower topper and crop dividers. Lower before stopping to avoid damage to turbocharger.
base cutter. Lower side knives and hydraulically 7. Shut OFF engine and remove key.
adjustable knockdown rollers (if equipped).
8. Lock cab doors.
3. Rotate elevator directly behind harvester. Lower
elevator. 9. Turn battery disconnect switch OFF.
4. Set park brake. 10. Inspect machine for any potential problems.
5. Shut OFF lights. 11. Clean harvester.
WM05597,000119E -19-12JAN15-1/1
Backup Alarm
If multi-function lever is moved rearward while engine is
running, backup alarm (A) sends an acoustical signal
to warn others around the machine that the operator is
backing up.
T8T1909 —UN—27JAN15
A—Backup Alarm
WM05597,0000F1D -19-23FEB15-1/1
55-3 041717
PN=120
Operating the Harvester
Sugar Cane Flow the elevator basket. From there, the billets are delivered
to the elevator. Meanwhile, the primary extractor fan
The gathering disks, on each side of the topper, gather extracts debris, leaves, and dirt from the cane and directs
cane tops and feed them to the topper severing disk, in it onto the ground behind the harvester. The elevator
center of the topper. The crop dividers then separate the system delivers the cane to a container system either
rows of down or tangled cane. The power knockdown to the rear, left-hand or right-hand side of the harvester.
rollers push the cane forward and down to the optimum As cane falls from end of elevator into the transport, the
angle for feeding into the harvester. The base cutters cut secondary extractor fan (if equipped) removes remaining
the bottom of the stalk. The butt-lifter roller then sends up loose material in the final stage of the process. This debris
cane into feed rollers that regulate the speed of the cane, is directed away from the field transport and harvester by
which determines length of the billet cut by the chopper. the rotating hood of the secondary extractor.
The chopper cleanly cuts even billets by slicing the cane
between two opposing blades and dropping them into
WM05597,0000EBF -19-04MAY15-1/1
Topper System
T8120002603 —UN—03JAN13
A—Gathering Disks C—Rotational Direction D—Whole Topper
B—Severing Disks
The gathering disks (A) on each side of the topper, gather The whole topper (D) operates in the same manner.
the cane tops and feed them to the severing disks (B),
located in the center. The rotational direction (C) of the IMPORTANT: ALWAYS allow topper to completely stop
severing disks determine if the cane tops are thrown left or rotating before changing rotational direction.
right. The direction is selected by the operator in the cab.
Once the cane is topped, the severed tops are discharged
by the rotary motion of the gathering disks.
KR43067,0000CAA -19-25JAN13-1/1
60-1 041717
PN=121
Operating the Harvester
CM992500027 —UN—10JAN00
CM992500041 —UN—10JAN00
CM992500042 —UN—10JAN00
If tops are not being thrown away from machine, check
for: loose blade bolts, missing blades, or topper height
set too high.
Topper Options:
1. Whole Topper: Whole tops are cut from stalk and
discharged to left-hand or right-hand side.
Specification
Whole Topper—Width..................................................................... 1.8 m
(71.5 in.) 3. Shredder Topper:Shredded tops are spread out
2. Extended Width Whole Topper: for gathering thick better in the field, are easier to incorporate in the soil
or wide crops. when cultivating, and decompose faster.
Specification
Extended Width Whole
Topper—Width................................................................................. 2.4 m
(93.1 in.)
WM05597,000119B -19-12JAN15-1/1
60-2 041717
PN=122
Operating the Harvester
Crop Divider
The crop dividers are designed to help separating rows of
downed or tangled cane. The scrolls turn with a screwing
motion, which picks up the cane and separates the rows.
• The crop divider scrolls can untangle and pick up the
downed cane. When operating too fast, the cane can
break and bend, causing it to hang up on the crop
divider. This causes damage to billets and stubble.
• Operating too fast pulls whole stalks out from row being
harvested or from the next row. Pulling whole stalks
from the row brings roots and dirt into the harvester,
detracting from the cleaning process.
• Always raise to the transport position when backing
T8140000078 —UN—17FEB14
up the harvester. This prevents the crop divider shoes
from digging into the ground.
• The tilt of the crop divider can be changed manually or
hydraulically. The hydraulic option allows the operator
to adjust the tilt from the cab to adapt to different cane
conditions in the field.
• Crop dividers are equipped with both inner and outer
scrolls. Outer Scrolls rotate in opposite direction of
inner scrolls to push cane of adjacent row away from
the machine.
• Hydraulically adjustable height side knives (if equipped)
are recommended for lodged cane. Side knives cut
lodged cane when it is being raised and separated to
prevent pulling stalks from the ground.
•
T8T314 —UN—29APR14
Crop divider vine cutter knives (A), if equipped, prevent
vines from wrapping around the crop dividers.
WM05597,0000E4E -19-06JAN15-1/1
T8T413 —UN—14MAY14
to prevent cane from getting outside the mouth of the
harvester after being gathered and cut. The side walls
drag on ground behind crop dividers to gather cane.
When the harvester is in cut position, the side walls
extend harvester walls to the ground.
60-3 041717
PN=123
Operating the Harvester
T8T5066 —UN—22NOV16
inches high.
2. The lower position (B) is used for crop rows 5 inches
or higher.
3. Retain floating side wall in desired position using cap
screw, washers, bushing, and lock nut (C).
AS09261,000016F -19-22NOV16-2/2
T8140000375 —UN—18MAR14
1. Loosen cap screw (A).
2. Remove and retain round head cap screws (B),
washers, and nuts.
3. Raise or lower crop divider side skirt (C) to desired
position.
4. Retain with previously removed round head cap
screws, washers, and nuts.
A—Cap Screw C—Crop Divider Side Skirt
5. Tighten cap screw (A). B—Round Head Cap Screw (3
used)
6. Repeat on the other crop divider.
AS09261,00000C7 -19-11OCT16-1/1
60-4 041717
PN=124
Operating the Harvester
T8T533 —UN—02JUN14
T8T534 —UN—02JUN14
Top Position Shown Bottom Position Shown
NOTE: Inner crop divider side skirts have five positions. 2. Adjust side skirt (D) to desired position.
The forward hole (A) is used for the top four positions.
The rearward hole (B) is for the bottom position. 3. Install previously removed hardware.
60-5 041717
PN=125
Operating the Harvester
T8T424 —UN—16MAY14
T8T425 —UN—16MAY14
A—Crop Divider Scrolls (2 used) B—Mounting Hole (Upper Lift C—Mounting Hole (Lower Lift
Arm) Arm)
CAUTION: Crop divider is heavy. Approximate The middle set of holes is for in the middle cultivation
weight of crop divider is 499 kg (1100 lb.). practices. This position covers most conditions.
Use appropriate lifting device to support
The lower set of holes is for flat or low row.
and position divider. Verify that weight is
balanced before lifting fully. Mount crop dividers on matching holes for
right-hand and left-hand sides.
IMPORTANT: If machine is equipped with floating crop
dividers and crop divider height is changed, 4. Install previously removed cap screw, washer, and nut
sensor linkage must be adjusted. See Calibrate to upper mounting hole (B) crop divider.
System in Floating Crop Divider and Contour
Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped) section. 5. Install previously removed cap screw, washer, and nut
to lower mounting hole (C) crop divider.
1. Attach sling to crop divider scrolls (A). 6. Repeat on remaining crop divider.
2. Remove and retain cap screw, washer, and nut from 7. Calibrate “Left Crop Divider Position” and “Right Crop
crop divider and upper lift arms. Repeat for lower lift Divider Position”. See Calibration Procedures section.
arms.
If machine is equipped with floating crop dividers, see
3. Use appropriate lifting device to raise or lower crop Calibrate System in Floating Crop Divider and Contour
divider to desired position. Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped) section.
NOTE: Upper mounting holes are for high row
profiles, if applicable.
WM05597,0000EA4 -19-21MAY15-1/1
WM05597,000116F -19-19NOV14-1/1
60-6 041717
PN=126
Operating the Harvester
T8T1239 —UN—24SEP14
Some Parts Removed For Clarity
A—Hardware (3 used) B—Hardware
C—Mounting Position (5 used)
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death 2. Loosen hardware (A) and remove hardware (B) from
from falling equipment. Support weight of linkage.
crop divider assembly before removing or
3. Raise or lower front of crop divider until tilt is at desired
loosening any hardware.
setting.
Crop divider is heavy. Approximate weight of
4. Install previously removed hardware (B) in desired
crop divider is 386 kg (850 lb.). Use appropriate
mounting position (C).
lifting device to support and position divider.
5. Tighten hardware (A).
1. Support crop divider with appropriate lifting device.
6. Repeat on remaining crop divider.
WM05597,000116D -19-19NOV14-1/1
points are adjusted too low, it feeds soil into the base
cutter. In field conditions with stones or heavy weeds, it
may be necessary to lift the shoe slightly off the ground.
WM05597,0000F66 -19-10DEC14-1/1
60-7 041717
PN=127
Operating the Harvester
Knockdown Rollers
The knockdown roller system consists of manually or
hydraulically (if equipped) adjustable upper roller and
lower roller. Together, these rollers push cane forward,
before it is cut by the base cutter, allowing it to fall in
optimal position for feeding into the harvester. The
T8T563 —UN—29SEP14
knockdown rollers also comb cane in order for it to line up
with the harvester and enter the throat in a uniform manner.
• Positioning the roller too low will cause the cane to split
when cut by the base cutter.
• Positioning the roller too high may allow shorter cane to
enter the harvester still standing. The standing cane will
not feed properly into the feed rollers and there may be
some crop damage or loss. A—Upper Knockdown Roller B—Lower Knockdown Roller
• Proper positioning should allow the cane to enter
correctly. There should be little or no crop damage.
NOTE: To make the adjustable knockdown roller system
more aggressive, more teeth may be added.
WM05597,00010E1 -19-09DEC14-1/1
T8T3376 —UN—27OCT15
A—Knockdown Roller Raise B—Knockdown Roller Lower
Switch Switch
WM05597,00013CA -19-27OCT15-1/1
60-8 041717
PN=128
Operating the Harvester
T8T1240 —UN—24SEP14
from falling equipment. Support weight of
knockdown roller assembly before removing
or loosening any hardware.
Use appropriate lifting device to support and
position knockdown roller.
1. Support upper knockdown roller with appropriate lifting Some Parts Removed For Clarity
device.
2. Loosen hardware (A) and remove hardware (B) from A—Hardware C—Mounting Positions
B—Hardware (2 used)
linkage.
3. Adjust upper knockdown roller until tilt is at desired
setting. 5. Tighten hardware (A).
4. Install previously removed hardware (B) in desired
mounting position (C).
WM05597,00013EF -19-08DEC15-1/3
T8T1292 —UN—24SEP14
Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown Viewed From Below Machine
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death 2. Remove hardware (A) from both sides of machine.
from falling equipment. Support weight of
knockdown roller assembly before removing 3. Adjust lower knockdown roller until tilt is at desired
or loosening any hardware. setting.
Use appropriate lifting device to support and 4. Install previously removed hardware in desired
position knockdown roller. mounting position (C).
60-9 041717
PN=129
Operating the Harvester
T8T3385 —UN—08DEC15
T8T3386 —UN—08DEC15
Raised Position Lowered Position
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death 2. Loosen hardware (A) and remove and retain hardware
from falling equipment. Support weight of (B) from both sides of machine.
knockdown roller assembly before removing
or loosening any hardware. 3. Adjust lower knockdown roller until tilt is at desired
setting.
Use appropriate lifting device to support and
position knockdown roller. 4. Install previously removed hardware in desired
mounting position (C).
1. Support lower knockdown roller with appropriate lifting 5. Tighten previously loosened hardware.
device.
WM05597,00013EF -19-08DEC15-3/3
Base Cutter
The base cutter is a pair of counter-rotating disks with
replaceable blades designed to cleanly cut cane at ground
level without splitting it. Base cutter rotation directs
cane flow upward into the feed rollers with help from the
butt-lifter. Base cutter has grease packed leg bearings.
T8T1298 —UN—29SEP14
Kickers on base cutter legs are replaceable.
Numbers of blades—5 per disk.
The base cutter is available with 4 types of
blades—using quality blades on the base cutter, the cane
flows into the feed rollers more smoothly, preventing
stubble and dirt from entering the harvester. This also
provides a cleaner cut and healthier stubble.
• 22” Scalloped Disk—Used in muddy areas to prevent
• 6 mm—two cutting edges—short rock blade mud from building up on the base cutter disks.
• 6 mm—four cutting edges
• 4 mm—two cutting edges Other options are:
• 4 mm—four cutting edges • Breakaway Legs—A fuse is incorporated to allow the
The base cutter is available with 3 types of disk: leg to break instead of the base cutter gearing.
• Leg Wraps—Used on the legs to prevent eye damage
• 24”—Standard use in areas while little on no rocks. when cutting seed cane.
• 22”—Used in areas with lots of rock, allows for a wider • Leg Kickers—Assists in feeding cane through the base
gap between the disk for rocks to fall to the ground. cutter and protects the legs from cane wear.
WM05597,00010E3 -19-29SEP14-1/1
60-10 041717
PN=130
Operating the Harvester
T8T4726 —UN—25AUG16
• C—Most Aggressive (approximately 17°) Angle, used
in high, and narrow crops to minimize the loss of cane
on the sides.
AS09261,00000A5 -19-12SEP16-1/1
T8130003021 —UN—26NOV13
T8130003022 —UN—26NOV13
Left-Hand Side Of Machine Shown Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
A—Front Nuts (1 used per side) B—Middle Nuts (1 used per side) C—Rear Nuts (1 used per side)
CAUTION: Avoid crushing injury. Use IMPORTANT: Apply Araldite to threads of nuts
appropriate jack of adequate capacity when before installing
adjusting base cutter angle.
4. Raise or lower the gear case to the desired angle and
1. Install a jack under the base cutter gear case. install previously removed front nuts.
2. Remove and retain the nut (A) from each side of the 5. Tighten all nuts to specification.
gear case. Specification
IMPORTANT: Support the weight of the gear case Base Cutter Mounting
before loosening nuts. Nuts—Torque..............................................................................427 N·m
(315 lb·ft)
3. Loosen the middle and rear nuts (B and C) on each
side of the gear case.
AS09261,00000A6 -19-13SEP16-1/1
60-11 PN=131
041717
Operating the Harvester
T8T4727 —UN—25AUG16
• Position C—Mid-level (approximately 13°) Angle, used
•
in most situations with flat rows.
Position D—Most Aggressive (approximately 15°)
Angle, used when rows are below flat and narrow crops
9
to minimize the loss of cane on the sides.
AS09261,00000BF -19-11OCT16-1/1
T8T4782 —UN—01SEP16
Left-Hand Side of the Machine Right-Hand Side of the Machine
A—Front Nuts (1 used per side) B—Middle Nuts (1 used per side) C—Rear Nuts (1 used per side)
CAUTION: Avoid crushing injury. Use IMPORTANT: Apply Araldite to threads of nuts
appropriate jack of adequate capacity when before installing.
adjusting base cutter angle.
4. Raise or lower the gear case to the desired angle and
1. Install jack under the base cutter gear case. install previously removed front nuts.
2. Remove and retain the nut (A) from each side of the 5. Tighten all nuts to specification.
gear case. Specification
IMPORTANT: Support the weight of the gear case Base Cutter Mounting
before loosening nuts. Nuts—Torque..............................................................................427 N·m
(315 lb·ft)
3. Loosen the middle and rear nuts (B and C) on each
side of the gear case.
AS09261,00000BC -19-23SEP16-1/1
60-12 PN=132
041717
Operating the Harvester
T8T4847 —UN—20SEP16
3. Tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Cap Screws—Torque....................................................................62 N·m
(46 lb·ft)
AS09261,00000F8 -19-11OCT16-1/1
T8T4848 —UN—20SEP16
3. Tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Cap Screws—Torque....................................................................64 N·m
46 lb·ft
AS09261,00000FD -19-11OCT16-1/1
60-13 041717
PN=133
Operating the Harvester
T8T1231 —UN—22SEP14
following and a sub-menu that enable operator to
select other optional screens.
c. Sub-Menu:
— Chopper Pressure
— Base Cutter Height
— Base Cutter Pressure B
• When operating, keep the harvester directly over the
center of the row being cut. This prevents the base
cutter from missing any cane and causing torn or
broken stalks. A—Base Cutter Blade (New) B—Measurement
• Always consider the base cutter blade life and the
ground conditions when determining the ground speed
and height to harvest your crop. • Base Cutter Blade Care:
• Adjust the base cutter height so it just trims the top a. After the edge is worn, rotate the blades to opposite
of the row, allowing the least amount of dirt into the disk.
harvester. Cutting too high causes the splitting of cane b. When the edge rounds on both sides, remove all
and less tonnage. Cutting too low causes dirt and blades from the base cutter disks.
stubble to enter harvester. c. Cut approximately 76 mm (3 in.) off the worn end of the
• Straight sided blades (A) without rounded corners blade (B). This gives you a straight sided blade with a
perform the best. Rounded edges indicate worn and new cutting edge. Mount blades back onto disks using
dull blades. different mounting holes, and rotate when necessary.
WM05597,0000E30 -19-10DEC14-1/1
Feed Rollers
The feed rollers carry the cane from base cutter to
chopper. The speed that the cane passes through the
harvester in comparison with the constant speed of the
chopper drums determines billet length. See Billet Length
Manual Adjustment (If Equipped) in this section for more
information.
Cleaning also occurs through gaps, between feed rollers
and choppers, as the cane passes through the rollers.
These gaps allow dirt and rocks to fall from the cane
before chopping.
T8T409 —UN—08MAY14
WM05597,0000F86 -19-08MAY14-1/1
60-14 041717
PN=134
Operating the Harvester
T8T410 —UN—08MAY14
3. Properly operating rollers ensure well-regulated billet
size.
4. Keep the rollers free of mud and debris to prevent
slippage.
A—Teeth
WM05597,0000F87 -19-10DEC14-1/1
T8T1299 —UN—29SEP14
The butt-lifter is available in 3 configurations:
• 3 Paddle Closed—Used in areas that are normally dry
during harvest.
• 3 Paddle Open—Used in areas where conditions are
rainy and muddy during harvest.
• 4 Bar Open—Minimizes soil intake and mud buildup in
rainy and muddy conditions.
WM05597,00010E4 -19-13JAN15-1/1
T8T404 —UN—29SEP14
The billet length selector valve controls the speed of feed
rollers by reducing oil flow to feed roller motors to slow
them or increase flow to speed them up. The selector
valve is on the right-hand side of the harvester, under the
hydraulic tank. It is reached from the engine compartment
or by opening the panel for side access. Adjust the
length of the billets through handle (A). The lower number Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
selected, the smaller the billet produced and vice versa.
This adjustment is important to determine size of the billet A—Handle
the machine produces, according to operator’s needs.
The size of the billets involves loss of sucrose and weight.
• The larger the billet the smaller the cut area and
• The smaller the billet the more dense the weight in the therefore less sucrose is lost. The transport load is
transport, because the load is more evenly distributed lighter, increasing transport costs.
in the truck.
Negatively, smaller billets have more cut area on the
cane so there is an increased loss of sucrose.
WM05597,0000F49 -19-06MAY14-1/1
60-15 041717
PN=135
Operating the Harvester
Chopper System
T8T5065 —UN—22NOV16
T8T2442 —UN—06MAY15
60-16 041717
PN=136
Operating the Harvester
NW271000 —UN—15MAY06
T8130003023 —UN—26NOV13
Incomplete cut
The differential chopper system was designed not only to has, the smaller the billets are. Billet length can be
extend blade life, but to improve and maintain billet quality. adjusted further using the optional billet length manual
The cutting action of the blades resembles scissors. adjustment. For more information, see Billet Length
Manual Adjustment (If Equipped) in this section.
1. Maintain chopper system in good condition always.
2. The extractors separate leaf debris properly when Billet Deflector Shield is a three position metal shield
blades are timed correctly. The leaves, as well as used to deflect cane billets at the desired angle as they
the cane, are cleanly cut by sharp blades when exit the choppers. The higher the angle, the closer to the
synchronized correctly. Blades need to have full blade primary extractor billets are thrown. The lower position
contact, but not gouge or hit hard. Make daily checks prevents light cane from going through the primary
and adjust if necessary. extractor. For adjustment, see Adjust Billet Deflector
3. Blunt edges and badly synchronized choppers cause Shield in Maintenance—As Required section
incomplete cuts and may result in reduced container
weights. Some of these incomplete cuts turn with the Chopper Deflector Plate is an adjustable plate installed
elevator slats and dangle from the cart guard. The underneath the chopper sill roller to help prevent sugar
operator knows that blades need to be changed when cane return. For adjustment, see Adjust Chopper
they see this happen. Deflector Shield in Maintenance—As Required section
4. Chopper system is available in 6-, 8-, and 10-blade
configurations. The more blades a chopper system
AS09261,00000FC -19-11OCT16-1/1
Elevator Basket
The elevator basket is designed to collect cane billets
from the chopper and direct them to the elevator.
IMPORTANT: Overloading the basket can cause
T8140000407 —UN—22SEP14
WM05597,0000ED2 -19-07APR14-1/1
60-17 041717
PN=137
Operating the Harvester
Primary Extractor
Using a fan, the extractor removes trash, leaves, and dirt
from the cane before dropping into the elevator basket.
The separated debris and leaves are directed onto the
ground behind the harvester by the primary extractor
hood. This is a major part of the cleaning process.
T8T2931 —UN—13AUG15
Primary Extractor Options:
Duraliner (Vidaplate) Steel Wear Ring—Highly abrasive
resistant material replaces the standard wear ring and
prolongs the life of the wear ring.
WM05597,000138E -19-13AUG15-1/1
T8T1562 —UN—04MAY15
elevator is rotated. See Primary Extractor Screen in
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section for more
information.
2. Performance decreases as fan blades wear. Blades
should always be replaced before they are badly
worn. When replacing blades, change them as a set.
They are sold in a kit of four; do not mix individual
blades from one set to another. The four blades have
B
been weighed and should not be separated. See
Remove and Install Primary Extractor Fan Blades in
Maintenance—As Required section for procedure.
3. Vibrations in the extractor area of the harvester
should be monitored continuously. As blades wear,
the fan becomes unbalanced and vibrates. Running
T8T2911 —UN—07AUG15
an unbalanced fan can cause severe damage to the
harvester. Change all four blades if the set becomes
unbalanced.
4. When using variable speed primary extractor, set rpm
of the fan when entering a new block of cane. The
proper setting allows debris to be extracted without
billets. Pay attention to the sound billets make as they
hit the extractor hood. This indicates if fan speed is
too high. A—Wear B—Dirt
5. Smart power mode allows the operator to reduce the
speed of the primary extractor automatically when
elevator is turned off. See Primary Extractor Screen
in GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section for CAUTION: Do not set the extractor fan speed
more information. greater than 930 rpm or premature blade wear
6. Debris should always be removed from fan blades and extractor hood damage may occur.
immediately to get maximum cleaning ability.
7. Built-up dirt and cane debris should be cleaned NOTE: Software logic has been improved for a more
regularly from hood and wear ring. consistent primary extractor fan performance
8. Inspect blades every 25 hours. See Remove under varying crop loads.
and Install Primary Extractor Fan Blades in
Maintenance—As Required section.
GreenStar is a trademark of Deere & Company
AS09261,0000099 -19-12OCT16-1/1
60-18 041717
PN=138
Operating the Harvester
Elevator System
T8140000094 —UN—04MAR14
The elevator system delivers cane to a field transport IMPORTANT: The elevator must be in the UP
system either to the rear, left-hand, or right-hand side of position before swinging and positioned
the harvester. The perforated floor allows loose material directly behind the machine before lowering.
to fall through, which is an additional feature of the Swinging elevator with cylinder not fully
cleaning process. retracted may break cylinder rod and damage
The elevator has a high clearance to minimize damage air louvers, basket, elevator support cable,
caused by various cane containers that may come into and primary extractor housing.
contact with the underside. The height of the elevator
is adjustable from the cab by two hydraulic cylinders Additional lowering is gained by raising the base cutter
supporting the elevator. The elevator swing table swings lift cylinders.
left and right a total of 170°. Elevator Options:
The elevator is made up of twin lengths of roller type
chain, connected by slats, which are bolted to the chain
• Elevator Speed Control—See Elevator Screen in
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section for more
links. The conveyor is driven by orbital motors, mounted information.
on both sides that are fully reversible to clear blockages.
Elevator Extension Options:
To maintain correct chain tension, drive motors are
mounted in an adjuster box that allows chain adjustment. • Standard elevator is recommended for row spacing
The chain on each side is driven by a sprocket, which is between 1.4—1.6 m (4.59—5.24 ft.).
mounted directly to the drive motor shaft. • 30 cm (12 in.) extended elevator is recommended for
row spacing between 1.6—1.7 m (5.24—5.57 ft.).
The idler chain alignment sprockets are adjustable to
allow correct clearance between elevator chain and floor.
• 61 cm (24 in.) extended elevator is recommended for
row spacing between 1.7—1.8 m (5.57—5.90 ft.).
The correct alignment is when the elevator chain just
touches the wear strips as it leaves the sprocket, yet does
• 86 cm (34 in.) extended elevator is recommended for
row spacing between 1.8—1.9 m (5.90—6.23 ft.).
not allow cane to get under the slats.
GreenStar is a trademark of Deere & Company
WM05597,0001391 -19-14AUG15-1/1
60-19 041717
PN=139
Operating the Harvester
CM063510015 —UN—20OCT05
damaged. Over filling can overload the hydraulic
motors. If the primary extractor fan protection cap
comes into contact with the accumulated cane,
premature wearing and deformation can occur due
to friction with the cane.
2. Elevator floor should always be free of dirt and debris
to aid in cleaning ability.
3. Chain to wearstrip clearance should be adjusted
regularly using the grease cylinder. (See Check and Over Filling Can Cause Damage
Adjust Elevator Chain Tension in Maintenance—Every
50 Hours section for detailed adjustment procedure.)
4. Too much slat-to-floor clearance or worn chains can
cause cane to become lodged under slats causing
cane damage. Chain and slat damage can also
contribute to loose chains or worn wearstrips.
5. Check chains daily for damage or loose links. This
T8T412 —UN—12MAY14
can cause the chain to break during operation.
IMPORTANT: Adding extra slats to the chains
reduces space between slats and
decreases chain life.
Never install slats between two links. This
causes abnormal wear to chain and sprocket
and possibly damage to the elevator floor.
A—Distance
6. To maximize chain life, move elevator slats to alternate
links every 500 hours of operation.
7. Elevator slats are reversible and can be rotated to 8. Change elevator chain when distance (A) between 5
extend life of slats. links stretches to 47 cm (18-1/2 in.).
AS09261,00001DA -19-20MAR17-1/1
WM05597,0001198 -19-09JAN15-1/1
60-20 041717
PN=140
Operating the Harvester
NW270950 —UN—15MAY06
Always run harvester at full throttle to achieve maximum
cleaning from the extractor.
Debris should be removed immediately to achieve
maximum cleaning capability.
Remove any cane debris or weeds that lodge between the
fan hub and support structure.
Keep extractor bearings lubricated.
Built-up dirt (B) should be cleaned regularly from shields.
Vibrations in extractor area of harvester should be
monitored continuously. As blades wear, the fan can
become unbalanced and may vibrate. Running an
NW270940 —UN—15MAY06
unbalanced fan can cause severe damage to the
secondary extractor. Always balance new blades after
they are installed to the hub.
Visually inspect hub for cracks and damage.
WM05597,0001195 -19-09FEB15-1/1
T8130003044 —UN—11DEC13
WM05597,00012D9 -19-28APR15-1/1
60-21 041717
PN=141
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
65-1 041717
PN=142
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8130002609 —UN—29OCT13
T8T641 —UN—19JUN14
Diagnostic Readings Page
T8130002610 —UN—29OCT13
Machine components raise and lower
automatically during calibration.
Machine MUST be parked on a hard, level surface.
Operator MUST remain in operator seat through
entire calibration procedure.
6. Disengage harvesting function switch. 11. Fully lower base cutter and verify Base Cutter Actual
Height on cornerpost display shows “0”.
7. Touch diagnostic switch (A), calibration softkey (B),
then calibrations menu (C). NOTE: If Base Cutter Actual Height does not display
correct reading, run calibration again.
8. Touch “Basecutter Height” calibration.
9. Touch enter/accept softkey (D) and follow instructions
shown on display to calibrate base cutter height.
Continued on next page WM05597,0001164 -19-19NOV14-1/3
65-2 041717
PN=143
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8120001379 —UN—20SEP12
12. Fully raise base cutter.
13. Fully raise crop dividers then fully lower crop dividers
to ground.
14. Adjust crop divider tilt to desired harvest position.
15. Touch diagnostic switch (A) then readings menu (B).
16. Touch “Floating Crop Divider” calibration.
17. Touch enter/accept softkey (C).
T8130002611 —UN—31OCT13
18. Verify that “LH Crop Divider Position Voltage” and “RH
Crop Divider Position volts” fall between 0.7—4.6 V.
NOTE: If voltage readings do not fall between 0.7—4.6
V, then sensor linkage must be adjusted
before continuing calibration.
65-3 041717
PN=144
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8130002609 —UN—29OCT13
T8T641 —UN—19JUN14
Diagnostic Readings Page
19. Touch diagnostic switch (A), calibration softkey (B),
then calibrations menu (C).
20. Touch “Left Crop Divider Position” calibration.
21. Touch enter/accept softkey (D) and follow instructions
T8130002610 —UN—29OCT13
shown on display to calibrate left-hand crop divider
position.
22. Repeat procedure for “Right Crop Divider Position”
calibration.
23. Touch diagnostic switch (A), calibration softkey (B),
then calibrations menu (C).
24. Touch “Left Crop Divider Pressure” calibration. Diagnostic Calibrations Page
65-4 041717
PN=145
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8T560 —UN—13JUN14
4. Turn OFF park brake switch and position harvester at
beginning of a previously cut row.
5. Engage harvesting functions in forward motion.
6. Verify that multi-function lever is in neutral or forward
position.
7. Press left-hand crop divider down switch (E) once
(single-click) to activate both floating crop dividers.
NOTE: If only one crop divider is enabled with box (B
or C), only that crop divider floats.
T8T2946 —UN—01SEP15
dividers are dragging, increase pressure percentage
on crop divider by pressing corresponding floating
crop divider pressure increase softkeys (F).
9. Set crop divider pressures:
NOTE: When harvester is not moving, system
goes into pause mode.
T8T1915 —UN—28JAN15
d. Crop dividers should fall to ground as base cutter
is raised.
e. If crop dividers do not fall when raising base cutter,
decrease pressure percentage on crop divider
by pressing corresponding floating crop divider
pressure decrease softkeys (G).
f. Repeat steps A—E as needed until crop dividers
lower sufficiently when base cutter is raised. A—Switch E—Left-Hand and Right-Hand
B—Left-Hand Floating Crop Crop Divider Down Switch
10. Decrease crop divider pressure percentages slightly Divider Enable Box F— Floating Crop Divider
to account for pressure from cane stalks. C—Right-Hand Floating Crop Pressure Increase Softkeys
Divider Enable Box G—Floating Crop Divider
NOTE: If soil is hard, crop divider pressures may D—Floating Crop Divider Reset Pressure Decrease
be increased slightly. Softkey Softkeys
65-5 041717
PN=146
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8T561 —UN—13JUN14
T8T2947 —UN—01SEP15
11. Position harvester at beginning of row.
12. Verify that floating crop dividers are activated.
13. Press switch (A) to enable Contour Base Cutter Height
Control.
14. Return to cut enable box (B) must display checkmark
T8T2948 —UN—01SEP15
within armrest display.
15. Cut cane manually and find the desired base cutter
height.
NOTE: Base cutter target capture and adjustment can be
done from base cutter screen or home page.
T8T1893 —UN—22JAN15
NOTE: A single select is slow advance. A select
and hold is quick advance.
19. If target and actual base cutter values are far apart,
select and hold base cutter target capture softkey (C)
for five seconds on consistent ground to calibrate
and sync target and actual base cutter position. If
calibration is successful, a confirmation alarm sounds.
WM05597,00013A0 -19-01SEP15-2/2
65-6 041717
PN=147
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8T560 —UN—13JUN14
2. Corresponding end of row enable boxes (B—D) must
display checkmarks within armrest display.
3. Raise or lower base cutter, left-hand crop divider, and
right-hand crop divider to desired height for headland
travel.
4. Select end of row set point capture all softkey (E) or
corresponding end of row set point capture icon (F) to
capture current position as end of row set point.
5. Current end of row set point (G) is displayed.
NOTE: Crop divider positions do not have to match exactly.
T8T2949 —UN—01SEP15
A—Switch E—End Of Row Set Point
B—Left-Hand Crop Divider End Capture All Softkey
Of Row Enable Box F— End Of Row Set Point
C—Right-Hand Crop Divider Capture Softkeys (3 used)
End Of Row Enable Box G—End Of Row Set Points (3
D—Base Cutter End Of Row used)
Enable Box
WM05597,00013A1 -19-01SEP15-1/1
Advanced Setup
1. Set floating crop divider sensitivity (A) and
contour base cutter height sensitivity (B) meters at
recommended starting sensitivity based on field type.
Recommended Starting
Field Surface Type
Sensitivity
Mostly Flat 1/2
Uneven 3/4
T8T1895 —UN—29APR15
2. Press corresponding sensitivity increase or decrease
softkeys (C—F) to adjust sensitivities as needed.
• If downed cane or excessive stubble is being left at
dips in field, raise sensitivities.
• Ideal sensitivity setting reacts as fast as possible
while not being uncomfortable for operator.
For more information, see Floating Crop Dividers and
Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped) in A—Floating Crop Divider D—Increase Softkey
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section. Sensitivity Meter E—Decrease Softkey
B—Contour Base Cutter Height F— Increase Softkey
Sensitivity Meter
C—Decrease Softkey
65-7 041717
PN=148
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8T560 —UN—13JUN14
T8T4671 —UN—15AUG16
To Turn ON Floating Crop Dividers:
NOTE: Any time key switch has been turned off, reset
floating crop dividers switch.
T8T4672 —UN—15AUG16
be done with a single click of the multi-function
lever before returning to the cut.
T8T4673 —UN—15AUG16
a checkmark within armrest display to enable floating
crop dividers for the desired side or sides.
4. Turn OFF park brake switch and position harvester
at beginning of row.
5. Engage harvesting functions in forward motion.
6. Verify that multi-function lever is in neutral or forward
position.
A—Switch F— Left-Hand and Right-Hand
7. Press left-hand or right-hand crop divider down switch B—Crop Divider Float Toggle Crop Divider Down
Softkey Switches
(F) once (single-click) to activate both floating crop C—Float Status Indicator G—Floating Crop Divider
dividers. D—Left-Hand Floating Crop Pressure Increase and
Divider Enable Box Decrease Softkeys
NOTE: If machine is turned off with the floating crop E—Right-Hand Floating Crop H—Floating Crop Divider Reset
dividers system active, cycle reset switch and Divider Enable Box Softkey
then cycle floating crop dividers switch. I— Left-Hand and Right-Hand
Crop Divider Up Switches
65-8 041717
PN=149
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
8. To adjust the target, press floating crop divider increase to activate end of row function and disengage floating
or decrease softkeys (G) for the corresponding crop crop dividers.
divider. A single click and hold of the crop divider up switch
9. To return setting back to 50% pressure percentage, manually raises that side only. After five seconds, the
press floating crop divider reset softkey (H). crop divider resumes float.
To Turn OFF Floating Crop Dividers: Press left-hand or To turn OFF floating crop dividers, turn off floating crop
right-hand crop divider up switch (I) twice (double-click) dividers switch (A).
AS09261,00000B1 -19-12OCT16-2/2
65-9 041717
PN=150
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8T561 —UN—13JUN14
T8T2947 —UN—01SEP15
To Turn ON Contour Base Cutter Height Control
System:
NOTE: Double Detent Function (Optional): See your
John Deere dealer for further information to enable
or disable the double detent function. When the
double detent function is disabled, the return to cut
T8T4676 —UN—17AUG16
and end of row functions are reconfigurable. When
enabled, the double detent is operated with switch
(C). Double detent is enabled by default.
T8T2951 —UN—01SEP15
5. Verify that multi-function lever is in neutral or forward
position.
NOTE: Floating Crop Dividers system must be
active in order to activate contour base cutter
height control system.
65-10 041717
PN=151
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8T4674 —UN—17AUG16
A single click and hold of the base cutter up switch
manually raises the base cutter. After five seconds, the
base cutter resumes float.
To turn OFF contour base cutter height control system,
turn off contour base cutter up switch (B) or floating crop
dividers switch.
T8T4675 —UN—17AUG16
AS09261,00000B4 -19-12OCT16-2/2
T8T1899 —UN—22JAN15
while cutting manually at desired base cutter pressure (B).
Select base cutter pressure graph (C) to open range
setup popup screen.
Select the increase or decrease softkeys (D) to adjust the
base cutter pressure target manually.
Select plus (+) or minus (-) softkeys to set range at
pressure above the set point the operator feels the A—Capture Softkey C—Graph
machine is digging and needs to raise. B—Base Cutter Pressure D—Increase and Decrease
Softkeys
Setting the range to a higher number makes it less
reactive to base cutter pressure increases. Setting the
range to a lower number makes it more reactive to base
cutter pressure increases.
WM05597,0001169 -19-28JAN15-1/1
65-11 041717
PN=152
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
T8T1902 —UN—23JAN15
1. Set detail machine information region to display
left-hand and right-hand crop divider positions (A and
B).
2. Run machine with floating crop divider and contour
base cutter height control systems engaged.
3. If crop divider positions go down to zero, the crop
dividers are all the way lowered and not touching A—Left-Hand Crop Divider B—Right-Hand Crop Divider
the ground. Change the pin position of the crop Position Position
dividers and recalibrate the crop divider positions
and pressures. See Adjust Crop Divider Height in
Operating the Harvester section and Calibrate System
in this section.
WM05597,000116A -19-28JAN15-1/1
65-12 041717
PN=153
Harvesting Hints
Harvesting Tips • Maintains engine speed (fixed rpm)
Different field conditions require different settings and
• Optimize fuel savings
approaches to harvesting sugar cane.
• More complex to set up
Automatic FieldCruise™:
In areas with low or light engine load:
• Variable field conditions (mixed cane, standing and
• Low or light engine load is where the engine is less than down)
90% continuous load. Change the display to show the • Variable engine speed
Engine load at rpm%. See Configure Detail Machine
Information in GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
• Optimize fuel savings
section for more information.
• Less complex to set up
• FieldCruise™ may be used to limit the high idle of the Always remember:
engine. See Engine Setup Screen in GreenStar™ 3
2630 Display Screens section for more information. • Always raise crop dividers and base cutter before
backing up.
• Crop dividers should be tilted up to lower the amount of
• Elevator must be in the UP position before rotating and
soil brought into the harvester.
positioned directly behind the machine before lowering.
• Elevator speed control (if equipped) may be used
• Field trash from the extractors should not be blown into
to reduce the elevator speed and wear on elevator
components. See Elevator Screen in GreenStar™ 3 field transport systems or into uncut, standing cane
2630 Display Screens section for more information. rows. Elevator swing/hood synchronization may be
enabled to rotate the primary extractor automatically
In areas with heavy engine load: when the elevator is rotated. See Primary Extractor
Screen in GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section
• Heavy engine load is where the engine has continuous for more information.
load due to the amount of cane the harvester is • When filling field transport systems, elevator discharge
processing. flap needs adjustment to more efficiently distribute the
• Tilt crop dividers downward. Crop divider toe lifts the cane billets.
cane into the throat of the harvester.
• Primary extractor speed should be changed as
• Automatic FieldCruise™ should be selected under this harvesting conditions change. If fan speed is too high,
condition as it will automatically adjust engine rpm billets will be heard hitting the extractor hood and
according to load changes. ejected out the extractor.
• Do NOT operate with FieldCruise™ on if engine is • Check primary extractor rpm when entering a new block
above 90% continuous load. of cane.
• Do NOT harvest at too high of speed. This may cause • Adjust base cutter height constantly so it trims just the
choking in the feed rollers and chopper system. top of the row, allowing the least amount of dirt into the
To lower fuel consumption and wear on the harvester: harvester. Cutting too high causes splitting of cane and
less tonnage. Cutting too low causes dirt and stubble to
• FieldCruise™ should be used to limit the high idle of the enter the harvester.
engine. See Engine Setup Screen in GreenStar™ 3 • When harvesting, keep harvester directly over the center
2630 Display Screens section for more information. of crop being cut. This prevents the base cutter from
• Smart power mode may be used to reduce the rpm of missing any cane and causing torn or broken stalks.
the primary extractor when the elevator is turned off. • Always use the topper, even on downed cane. The
See Primary Extractor Screen in GreenStar™ 3 2630 topper can still remove a certain percentage of tops to
Display Screens section for more information. aid in the cleaning process.
• Elevator speed control (if equipped) may be used • Be cautious when entering into a row. Possible
to reduce the elevator speed and wear on elevator recirculation of the chopped cane can occur near
components. See Elevator Screen in GreenStar™ 3 chopper when elevator basket is filled above capacity.
2630 Display Screens section for more information. Cane spillage out of the basket can also occur at this
time.
Manual FieldCruise™:
• Constant (uniform) field conditions
GreenStar is a trademark of Deere & Company
FieldCruise is a trademark of Deere & Company
AS09261,000009C -19-12OCT16-1/1
70-1 041717
PN=154
Harvesting Sugar Cane
Harvesting Safety Tips 7. Always check gauges periodically during the
harvesting operation.
1. Always keep elevator swung to the rear of the 8. Always shut OFF engine, remove key, and turn OFF
harvester while waiting for the transport unit in the field. battery disconnect switch before cutting out vines and
This eliminates field transports hitting the elevator. other chokes.
2. Do not let engine idle for more than 5 minutes. After 5
minutes of idling, shut OFF engine and restart when
CAUTION: Do NOT manually remove chokes
ready.
while engine is running.
3. Always use caution when harvesting near trees, utility
lines, and utility poles. Verify that both topper and
9. When clearing chokes from harvester, ALWAYS
elevator are clear.
allow components to come to a complete stop before
4. Always raise crop dividers when nearing the end of a
engaging harvesting functions in forward or reverse
row to avoid damaging harvester.
mode.
5. Use caution when cutting in unfamiliar fields.
10. ALWAYS keep fire extinguisher filled and charged.
6. Always harvest with engine at full throttle or with
Automatic FieldCruise™ active.
FieldCruise is a trademark of Deere & Company
WM05597,00010D9 -19-09JAN15-1/1
Harvesting Conditions • Cane that is down with the row should be cut so base of
There are many conditions that will dictate how a crop the stalk will enter harvester first. This eliminates risk of
must be harvested: uprooting cane.
• Some self-tipping transport units can only be loaded • Twisted and matted cane may require optional side
from one side. This may force downed cane to be cut knives to reduce uprooting from adjoining rows.
first. Under these conditions, ground speed is critical to
prevent uprooting cane before cutting.
• In all cases of cane harvesting, ground speed is
important in cutting cane to assure a good feed into the
• Cane that is down and cross-row should be cut in the harvester with minimal damage. Cutting too fast may
direction that allows crop dividers to lift cane up off the cause a bulldozer effect. It is essential that you monitor
adjoining row. the quality of cane going into field transport.
MB22538,0000097 -19-09SEP13-1/1
Planting for Mechanical Harvesting width will also help reduce the amount of cane that is
crushed or lost by off center cutting.
To minimize crop loss with mechanical harvesting, planting
should be done with the harvester in mind. • Row length is important to reduce turnarounds.
• Row spacing should conform to wheel width of • Headlands (field roads) should be wide enough to allow
harvester. This will minimize damage to cane and row, harvester to enter and exit without rolling over cane
while keeping harvester over center of row. Proper row rows. Roads should be 6 m (19 ft.) in width.
MB22538,00000A7 -19-09SEP13-1/1
75-1 041717
PN=155
Harvesting Sugar Cane
Harvesting a Field
It is best to harvest a field next to a road or a previously
cut field. This allows the harvester to open a field without
field transport rolling over more cane than necessary.
When a field must be harvested, field transport will have
to run over the third row of cane from the harvester. This
method will inevitably damage some cane. Rows should
be cut in same direction in which they were knocked
down. Narrow fields may require one opening in the
center. Width of a field is important, since in wide fields
more than one harvesting is required to reduce dead
travel between row cutting. To maximize harvesting time
the ideal number of rows, with the minimum of dead travel
CM002500253 —UN—10MAY01
between row cutting, is approximately 40. Cutting can be
from outside in, or if harvesting practices indicate, perform
field harvesting and row cutting from center out.
For example, a field that is 120 rows wide may require two
openings, 18—22 rows inward from both sides. These will
be cut from inside working outward.
The 40 rows in the center will be cut from outside working
inward, as the figure shows.
WM05597,0000E86 -19-24FEB14-1/1
75-2 041717
PN=156
Harvesting Sugar Cane
Standard Harvesting
CM982500044 —UN—04JAN00
AG,T803584,87 -19-05JUN00-1/1
75-3 041717
PN=157
Harvesting Sugar Cane
CM982500101 —UN—05JAN00
AG,T803584,88 -19-05JUN00-1/1
75-4 041717
PN=158
Harvesting Sugar Cane
Harvesting on a Headland
CM982500045 —UN—04JAN00
AG,T803584,89 -19-05JUN00-1/1
75-5 041717
PN=159
Harvesting Sugar Cane
T8120001827 —UN—05OCT12
KR43067,0000CD0 -19-17JAN13-1/1
75-6 041717
PN=160
Harvesting Sugar Cane
CM982500100 —UN—05JAN00
AG,T803584,91 -19-05JUN00-1/1
75-7 041717
PN=161
Transporting the Harvester
Loading Procedure
T8T5231 —UN—29MAR17
T8T5232 —UN—30MAR17
1. Remove and retain cap screws (A) and exhaust cover
(B).
2. Remove clamp (C) and exhaust pipe (D).
3. If still available, install the rain cap (E) to avoid water
intrusion.
4. Place clamp, exhaust cover, cap screws, and exhaust
pipe in a safe place during transport of harvester.
T8T5234 —UN—30MAR17
Continued on next page AS09261,00001F3 -19-11APR17-1/4
80-1 041717
PN=162
Transporting the Harvester
T8T5236 —UN—30MAR17
T8T5235 —UN—30MAR17
5. Remove rain cap (A).
6. Install clamp (B) and exhaust pipe (C).
7. Turn the exhaust pipe (C) so the outlet is at a 45
degree angle (D) away from the edge (E).
NOTE: Lubricate threads on the clamp with clean oil.
T8T5237 —UN—30MAR17
(35 lb·ft)
T8T5241 —UN—30MAR17
80-2 041717
PN=163
Transporting the Harvester
AS09261,00001F3 -19-11APR17-3/4
T8120002577 —UN—18DEC12
T8T1910 —UN—27JAN15
Left-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
T8T2454 —UN—08MAY15
lines. Keep distance of at least 3.05 m (10 ft)
plus an extra 100 mm (3.9 in) for every 1000 V
over 50 000 V. Local and state regulations or
job site opening devices may require greater
distance for safety reasons.
Be aware of local laws regarding height
regulations during transport. Remember to add Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
height of the trailer to height of harvester.
T8T559 —UN—13JUN14
• Use as many signal persons on the ground as needed
when loading and unloading. Coordinate hand signals
before starting the harvester.
• Drive harvester onto the trailer at a slow speed.
• The centerline of the harvester must be over the
centerline of the trailer.
• When the harvester is in place on the trailer, turn park
brake switch ON to engage the park brake.
• Lower the topper and elevator. Level the harvester. A—Rear Tie Down Point (2 C—Front Tie Down Point (2
• Apply safety stops to base cutter cylinders to prevent used) used)
the harvester from lowering. B—Upper Tie Down Point (2
• Turn OFF engine and turn battery disconnect switch used)
to OFF position.
• Fasten chains or cables to the proper tie-down points
transportation. This protects the turbocharger
(A—C). Do NOT put chains or cables over or against
hydraulic lines or hoses. from being damaged.
80-3 041717
PN=164
Transporting the Harvester
Towing Procedure
IMPORTANT:
• Engine cannot be started while towing.
• Never tow faster than 2 km/h (1 mph).
• Always tow harvester using rear or
front tow points.
• A hydraulic loop (free-flowing circuit) in
the ground drive system must be created
T8120002583 —UN—18DEC12
to allow oil to flow without restriction
through the final drives.
• Rear final drives must have brakes
released manually.
80-4 041717
PN=165
Transporting the Harvester
Tow Points
T8120002581 —UN—18DEC12
T8T1300 —UN—29SEP14
Rear Tow Points (Viewed From Below Swing Table) Front Tow Points
WM05597,0000FC8 -19-10DEC14-2/2
80-5 041717
PN=166
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Engines with Tier 3-Stage IIIA/MAR-I
Emission Control
The emission control programs set maximum emission
limits for engines, reducing the environmental impact of
vehicles and machinery on air quality.
BM010705 —UN—22JAN16
Tier 3-Stage IIIA certified engines meet the requirements
of US EPA Tier 3, EU Stage IIIA, and PROCONVE MAR-I
regarding the maximum emission limits for agricultural
machinery.
The programs consider both machinery and fuel as an
integrated system. Therefore, it is essential the correct
use and maintenance of the machine.
Fuel quality and sulfur content must comply to the Deere dealer for proper maintenance to ensure
specifications described in this Manual. the correct emission control.
IMPORTANT: If the engine or the engine auxiliaries
fail during the lifespan, contact your John
LS87647,000018B -19-27APR16-1/1
TS202 —UN—23AUG88
tank outdoors.
Prevent fires by keeping machine clean of accumulated
trash, grease, and debris. Always clean up spilled fuel.
Use only an approved fuel container for transporting
flammable liquids.
Never fill fuel container in pickup truck with plastic bed
liner. Always place fuel container on ground before
refueling. Touch fuel container with fuel dispenser nozzle Do not store fuel container where there is an open flame,
before removing can lid. Keep fuel dispenser nozzle in spark, or pilot light such as within a water heater or other
contact with fuel container inlet when filling. appliance.
DX,FIRE1 -19-12OCT11-1/1
85-1 041717
PN=167
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
RG22142 —UN—17MAR14
dissipating additive. However, there are many factors that
can reduce the effectiveness of the additive over time.
Static charges can build up in ULSD fuel while it is flowing
through fuel delivery systems. Static electricity discharge
when combustible vapors are present could result in a
fire or explosion.
Therefore, it is important to ensure that the entire system
used to refuel your machine (fuel supply tank, transfer
pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others) is properly
grounded and bonded. Consult with your fuel or fuel
system supplier to ensure that the delivery system is in
compliance with fueling standards for proper grounding
RG21992 —UN—21AUG13
and bonding practices.
DX,FUEL,STATIC,ELEC -19-12JUL13-1/1
85-2 041717
PN=168
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Diesel Fuel
Consult your local fuel distributor for properties of the
Sulfur content for Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4,
diesel fuel available in your area.
Stage III B, and Stage IV Engines
In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low
temperature requirements of the geographical area in • Use ONLY ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a
which they are marketed. maximum of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur content.
Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are Sulfur Content for Tier 3 and Stage III A Engines
recommended. Renewable diesel fuel produced by
hydrotreating animal fats and vegetable oils is basically
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 1000
mg/kg (1000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
identical to petroleum diesel fuel. Renewable diesel that
meets EN 590, ASTM D975, or EN 15940 is acceptable
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 1000—2000 mg/kg
(1000—2000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
for use at all percentage mixture levels. interval.
Required Fuel Properties • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
In all cases, the fuel shall meet the following properties: than 2000 mg/kg (2000 ppm), contact your John Deere
dealer.
Cetane number of 40 minimum. Cetane number greater
than 47 is preferred, especially for temperatures below Sulfur Content for Tier 2 and Stage II Engines
–20 °C (–4 °F) or elevations above 1675 m (5500 ft.).
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 2000
Cold Filter Plugging Point (CFPP) should be at least 5 mg/kg (2000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
°C (9 °F) below the expected lowest temperature or Cloud • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 2000—5000 mg/kg
Point below the expected lowest ambient temperature. (2000—5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval.
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
0.52 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1. than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere
A maximum scar diameter of 0.45 mm is preferred. dealer.
Diesel fuel quality and sulfur content must comply with Sulfur Content for Other Engines
all existing emissions regulations for the area in which
the engine operates. DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 5000
content greater than 10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm). mg/kg (5000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000
E-Diesel fuel mg/kg (5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval.
DO NOT use E-Diesel (Diesel fuel and ethanol blend).
Use of E-Diesel fuel in any John Deere machine may void IMPORTANT: Do not mix used diesel engine oil or any
the machine warranty. other type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel.
Improper fuel additive usage may cause damage
CAUTION: Avoid severe injury or death due to the
on fuel injection equipment of diesel engines.
fire and explosion risk from using E-Diesel fuel.
DX,FUEL1 -19-13JAN16-1/1
85-3 041717
PN=169
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
CAUTION: Reduce the risk of fire. Handle fuel When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require more
carefully. DO NOT fill the fuel tank when engine frequent replacement due to premature plugging.
is running. DO NOT smoke while you fill the
Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A
fuel tank or service the fuel system.
rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the
prevent water condensation and freezing during cold filler cap. If a new filler cap is required, always
weather. replace it with an original vented cap.
Keep all storage tanks as full as practical to minimize
When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is a
condensation.
slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the
Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed fuel and prevent water condensation. Contact your fuel
properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor water supplier or John Deere dealer for recommendations.
content of the fuel regularly.
DX,FUEL4 -19-15FEB13-1/1
Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States, If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John Deere
Canada, and the European Union have adequate lubricity Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or equivalent) at
to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel injection the specified concentration.
system components. However, diesel fuels manufactured
in some areas of the world may lack the necessary lubricity. Lubricity of BioDiesel Fuel
IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used Fuel lubricity can improve significantly with BioDiesel
in your machine demonstrates good blends up to B20 (20% BioDiesel). Further increase in
lubricity characteristics. lubricity is limited for BioDiesel blends greater than B20.
Testing Diesel Fuel operations, bacteria, cloud point, acid number, particulate
contamination, and whether the fuel meets specification.
A fuel analysis program can help to monitor the quality
of diesel fuel. The fuel analysis can provide critical Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
data such as cetane number, fuel type, sulfur content, diesel fuel analysis.
water content, appearance, suitability for cold weather
DX,FUEL6 -19-14APR11-1/1
85-4 041717
PN=170
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
BioDiesel Fuel
BioDiesel fuel is comprised of mono-alkyl esters of long
BioDiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations
chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal
fats. BioDiesel blends are BioDiesel mixed with petroleum The petroleum diesel portion of all BioDiesel blends must
diesel fuel on a volume basis. meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN 590
Before using fuel containing BioDiesel, review the (EU) commercial standard.
BioDiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations in BioDiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged to
this Operator’s Manual. purchase BioDiesel blends from a BQ-9000 Certified
Environmental laws and regulations can encourage or Marketer and sourced from a BQ-9000 Accredited
prohibit the use of biofuels. Operators should consult Producer (as certified by the National BioDiesel Board).
with appropriate governmental authorities prior to using Certified Marketers and Accredited Producers can be
biofuels. found at the following website: http://www.bq9000.org.
BioDiesel contains residual ash. Ash levels exceeding the
All John Deere Engines with Exhaust Filter
maximums allowed in either ASTM D6751 or EN14214
(Released 2011 and After)
can result in more rapid ash loading and require more
While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, BioDiesel frequent cleaning of the Exhaust Filter (if present).
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum The fuel filter can require more frequent replacement,
diesel fuel can be used. BioDiesel blends up to B20 when using BioDiesel fuel, particularly if switching from
can be used ONLY if the BioDiesel (100% BioDiesel or diesel. Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine.
B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent A rising oil level can indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% BioDiesel blends up to B20 must be used within 90 days
reduction in fuel economy when using B20. of the date of BioDiesel manufacture. BioDiesel blends
BioDiesel concentrations above B20 can harm the above B20 must be used within 45 days from the date
engine’s emission control systems and should not be of BioDiesel manufacture.
used. Risks include, but are not limited to, more frequent When using BioDiesel blends up to B20, the following
stationary regeneration, soot accumulation, and increased must be considered:
intervals for ash removal.
John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain
• Cold-weather flow degradation
detergent and dispersant additives, are required when
• Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption,
microbial growth)
using BioDiesel blends from B10—B20, and are
recommended when using lower BioDiesel blends.
• Possible filter restriction and plugging (usually a problem
when first switching to BioDiesel on used engines)
All John Deere Engines Excluding Exhaust Filter • Possible fuel leakage through seals and hoses
(Primarily Released Prior to 2012) (primarily an issue with older engines)
• Possible reduction of service life of engine components
While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, BioDiesel
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum Request a certificate of analysis from your fuel distributor
diesel fuel can be used. BioDiesel blends up to B20 to ensure that the fuel is compliant with the specifications
can be used ONLY if the BioDiesel (100% BioDiesel or provided in this Operator’s Manual.
B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent Consult your John Deere dealer for approved fuel
specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% conditioners to improve storage and performance with
reduction in fuel economy when using B20. BioDiesel fuels.
These John Deere engines can operate on BioDiesel The following must also be considered if using BioDiesel
blends above B20 (up to 100% BioDiesel). Operate at blends above B20:
levels above B20 ONLY if the BioDiesel is permitted
by law and meets the EN 14214 specification (primarily • Possible coking or blocked injector nozzles, resulting in
available in Europe). Engines operating on BioDiesel power loss and engine misfire if John Deere approved
blends above B20 might not fully comply with or be fuel conditioners are not used
permitted by all applicable emissions regulations. Expect • Possible crankcase oil dilution (requiring more frequent
up to a 12% reduction in power and an 18% reduction in oil changes)
fuel economy when using 100% BioDiesel. • Possible lacquering or seizure of internal components
• Possible formation of sludge and sediments
John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain • Possible thermal oxidation of fuel at elevated
detergent and dispersant additives, are required when temperatures
using BioDiesel blends from B10—B20, and are • Possible compatibility issues with other materials
recommended when using lower BioDiesel blends. (including copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass, and bronze)
used in fuel handling equipment
Continued on next page DX,FUEL7 -19-15MAY13-1/2
85-5 041717
PN=171
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
• Possible reduction in water separator efficiency ash loading and require more frequent cleaning of the
• Possible damage to paint if exposed to BioDiesel Exhaust Filter (if present)
• Possible corrosion of fuel injection equipment IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are
• Possible elastomeric seal and gasket material NOT acceptable for use as fuel in any
degradation (primarily an issue with older engines)
• Possible high acid levels within fuel system concentration in John Deere engines. Their
use could cause engine failure.
• Because BioDiesel blends above B20 contain more
ash, using blends above B20 can result in more rapid
DX,FUEL7 -19-15MAY13-2/2
85-6 041717
PN=172
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Use seasonal grade viscosity engine oil based on the If air-to-air aftercooling is used, the shutters must be
expected air temperature range between oil changes completely open by the time the intake manifold air
and a proper concentration of low silicate antifreeze as temperature reaches the maximum allowable temperature
recommended. (See DIESEL ENGINE OIL and ENGINE out of the charge air cooler.
COOLANT requirements in this section.) For more information, see your John Deere dealer.
DX,FUEL10 -19-15MAY13-1/1
85-7 041717
PN=173
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
85-8 041717
PN=174
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Diesel Engine Coolant (engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners) (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier
3/Stage III)
• John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate in a 40—60% When COOL-GARD II or COOL-GARD II PG is used, the
mixture of concentrate with quality water. drain interval is 3 years or 3000 hours of operation.
IMPORTANT: When mixing coolant concentrate with If a coolant other than COOL-GARD II or COOL-GARD II
water, do not use less than 40% or greater PG is used, reduce the drain interval to 2 years or 2000
than 60% concentration of coolant. Less than hours of operation.
40% gives inadequate additives for corrosion IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing
protection. Greater than 60% can result in additives or antifreeze that contains
coolant gelation and cooling system problems. sealing additives.
Other Coolants Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene
glycol base coolants.
Other ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base coolants
may be used if they meet the following specification: Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.
85-9 041717
PN=175
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
TS1732 —UN—04SEP13
A coolant refractometer is available through your
John Deere dealer under the SERVICEGARD™ tool
program. Part number 75240 provides an economical
solution to accurate freeze point determination in the field.
To use this tool:
SERVICEGARD™ Part Number 75240
1. Allow cooling system to cool to ambient temperatures.
2. Open radiator cap to expose coolant.
3. With the included dropper, collect a small coolant
sample.
4. Open the lid of the refractometer, place one drop of
coolant on the window and close the lid.
5. Look through the eyepiece and focus as necessary.
6. Record the listed freeze point for the type of coolant
(ethylene glycol coolant or propylene glycol) being
tested.
TS1733 —UN—04SEP13
85-10 041717
PN=176
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Some coolant additives gradually deplete during COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is not intended for use
engine operation. For COOL-GARD™ II pre-mix and with nitrite-containing coolants.
COOL-GARD II Concentrate, replenish coolant additives
between drain intervals by adding COOL-GARD II Coolant IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant
Extender. additive when the cooling system is drained
and refilled with any of the following:
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender should not be added
unless indicated by COOL-GARD II Test Strips. These • John Deere COOL-GARD II
test strips provide a simple, effective method to check the • John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
freeze point, additive levels, and pH of your engine coolant.
The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
Test the coolant solution at intervals of 12 months and additives can result in additive drop-out, gelation of the
whenever excessive coolant is lost through leaks or coolant, or corrosion of cooling system components.
overheating.
Add the recommended concentration of COOL-GARD
IMPORTANT: Do not use COOL-GARD II Test II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more than the
Strips with COOL-GARD II PG. recommended amount.
85-11 041717
PN=177
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Diesel Engine Break-In Oil — Non-Emissions Certified and Certified Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier
3, Stage I, Stage II, and Stage III
New engines are filled at the factory with either John • ACEA Oil Sequence E2
Deere Break-In™ or John Deere Break-In Plus™ • ACEA Oil Sequence E1
Engine Oil. During the break-in period, add John Deere
Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil, respectively, as IMPORTANT: Do not use Plus-50™ II, Plus-50™, or
needed to maintain the specified oil level. engine oils meeting any of the following for the
initial break-in of a new or rebuilt engine:
Operate the engine under various conditions, particularly API CK-4 ACEA E9
heavy loads with minimal idling, to help seat engine
API CJ-4 ACEA E7
components properly.
API CI-4 PLUS ACEA E6
If John Deere Break-In™ Engine Oil is used during the API CI-4 ACEA E5
initial operation of a new or rebuilt engine, change the oil
API CH-4 ACEA E4
and filter at a maximum of 100 hours.
API CG-4 ACEA E3
If John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil is used, change API CF-4
the oil and filter at a minimum of 100 hours and a API CF-2
maximum equal to the interval specified for John Deere
API CF
Plus-50™ II or Plus-50™ oil.
After engine overhaul, fill the engine with either John These oils do not allow the engine to
Deere Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil. break in properly.
If John Deere Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil is John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil can be used for
not available, use an SAE 10W-30 viscosity grade diesel all John Deere diesel engines at all emission certification
engine oil meeting one of the following and change the oil levels.
and filter at a maximum of 100 hours of operation:
After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50™
• API Service Classification CE II, John Deere Plus-50™, or other diesel engine oil as
• API Service Classification CD recommended in this manual.
• API Service Classification CC
Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.
Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company.
DX,ENOIL4 -19-02NOV16-1/1
85-12 041717
PN=178
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
SAE 15W-40
Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the
SAE 10W-40
following: 20 o C 68 o F
SAE 10W-30
SAE 0W-40
SAE 5W-30
• John Deere Torq-Gard™ 10 o C 50 o F
• API Service Category CK-4
• API Service Category CJ-4 0o C 32 o F
• API Service Category CI-4 PLUS
• API Service Category CI-4 -10 o C 14 o F
• API Service Category CH-4
• ACEA Oil Sequence E9 -20 o C -4 o F
TS1689 —UN—18JUL07
• ACEA Oil Sequence E7
• ACEA Oil Sequence E6 -30 o C -22 o F
• ACEA Oil Sequence E5
• ACEA Oil Sequence E4 -40 o C -40 o F
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in
which the engine operates.
DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than
10000 mg/kg (10000 ppm).
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,ENOIL7 -19-02NOV16-1/1
85-13 041717
PN=179
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
SAE 15W-40
Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the
SAE 10W-40
following: 20 o C 68 o F
SAE 10W-30
SAE 0W-40
SAE 5W-30
• John Deere Torq-Gard™ 10 o C 50 o F
• API Service Category CK-4
• API Service Category CJ-4 0o C 32 o F
• API Service Category CI-4 PLUS
• API Service Category CI-4 -10 o C 14 o F
• ACEA Oil Sequence E9
• ACEA Oil Sequence E7 -20 o C -4 o F
TS1691 —UN—18JUL07
• ACEA Oil Sequence E6
• ACEA Oil Sequence E5 -30 o C -22 o F
• ACEA Oil Sequence E4
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred. -40 o C -40 o F
DX,ENOIL,SERV,HIALT -19-11NOV14-1/1
85-14 041717
PN=180
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals — Tier 2 and Stage II Engines
Recommended oil and filter service intervals are based • Use only approved oil types.
on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil
and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel. Approved Oil Types:
Actual service intervals also depend on operation and
maintenance practices. • “Plus-50 Oils” include John Deere Plus-50™ II and
John Deere Plus-50™.
Use oil analysis to evaluate the condition of the oil and to • “Other Oils” include John Deere Torq-Gard™, API CK-4,
aid in selection of the proper oil and filter service interval. API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, API CH-4, ACEA
Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on E9, ACEA E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4.
engine oil analysis. Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals
Change the oil and oil filter at least once every 12 months Fuel Sulfur Less than 2000 mg/kg (2000 ppm)
even if the hours of operation are fewer than the otherwise Plus-50 Oils 375 hours
recommended service interval. Other Oils 250 hours
Diesel fuel sulfur content affects engine oil and filter Fuel Sulfur 2000—5000 mg/kg (2000—5000 ppm)
service intervals. Plus-50 Oils 275 hours
Other Oils 150 hours
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 2000 Fuel Sulfur 5000—10000 mg/kg (5000—10000 ppm)
mg/kg (2000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 2000—5000 mg/kg Plus-50 Oils 187 hours (See John Deere dealer)
(2000—5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change Other Oils 125 hours (See John Deere dealer)
interval. Oil analysis may extend the service interval of “Other Oils”, to a
• BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater maximum not to exceed the interval for Plus-50 Oils. Oil analysis means
than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere taking a series of oil samples at 50-hour increments beyond the normal
dealer. service interval until either the data indicates the end of useful oil life or
the maximum service interval of John Deere Plus-50 oils is reached.
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage:
• Reduce oil and filter service intervals by 50%
when using BioDiesel blends greater than B20.
Oil analysis may allow longer service intervals.
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,ENOIL12,T2,STD -19-02NOV16-1/1
85-15 PN=181
041717
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals — Tier 3 and Stage IIIA — PowerTech™ Plus Engines
Recommended oil and filter service intervals are based
on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil
• “Plus-50 Oils” include John Deere Plus-50™ II and
John Deere Plus-50™.
and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel.
Actual service intervals also depend on operation and
• “Other Oils” include John Deere Torq-Gard™, API
CK-4, API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, ACEA E9,
maintenance practices. ACEA E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4.
Use oil analysis to evaluate the condition of the oil and to NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change
aid in selection of the proper oil and filter service interval. interval is only allowed if all of the following
Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on conditions are met:
engine oil analysis.
Change the oil and oil filter at least once every 12 months
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less
than 1000 mg/kg (1000 ppm).
even if the hours of operation are fewer than the otherwise
recommended service interval.
• Use of John Deere Plus-50™ II or John
Deere Plus-50™ oil.
Diesel fuel sulfur content affects engine oil and filter • Use of an approved John Deere oil filter.
service intervals.
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 1000 Fuel Sulfur Less than 1000 mg/kg (1000 ppm)
mg/kg (1000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED. Plus-50 Oils 500 hours
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 1000—2000 mg/kg
Other Oils 250 hours
(1000—2000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval. Fuel Sulfur 1000—2000 mg/kg (1000—2000 ppm)
• BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater Plus-50 Oils 300 hours
than 2000 mg/kg (2000 ppm), contact your John Deere Other Oils 200 hours
dealer. Fuel Sulfur 2000—10000 mg/kg (2000—10000 ppm)
• DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than Plus-50 Oils Contact John Deere dealer
10000 mg/kg (10000 ppm).
Other Oils Contact John Deere dealer
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage: Oil analysis may extend the service interval of “Other Oils”, to a
maximum not to exceed the interval of Plus-50 Oils. Oil analysis means
• Reduce oil and filter service intervals by 50% taking a series of oil samples at 50-hour increments beyond the normal
when using BioDiesel blends greater than B20. service interval until either the data indicates the end of useful oil life or
Oil analysis may allow longer service intervals. the maximum service interval of John Deere Plus-50 oils is reached.
• Use only approved oil types.
85-16 PN=182
041717
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
T6828AB —UN—15JUN89
Oil and coolant samples should be taken from each
system before its recommended change interval.
Check with your John Deere dealer for the availability of
Oilscan™ and CoolScan™ kits.
T6829AB —UN—26AUG11
Oilscan is a trademark of Deere & Company
CoolScan is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,OILSCAN -19-13SEP11-1/1
Oil Filters of the bond between the filter media and the element end
cap, fatigue life of the canister (if applicable), and pressure
Filtration of oils is critically important for proper operation capability of the filter seal. Non-John Deere branded oil
and lubrication. John Deere brand oil filters have been filters might not meet these key John Deere specifications.
designed and produced specifically for John Deere
applications. Always change oil filters regularly as specified in this
manual.
John Deere filters adhere to engineering specifications for
quality of the filter media, filter efficiency rating, strength
DX,FILT1 -19-11APR11-1/1
85-17 041717
PN=183
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Some John Deere brand coolants and lubricants may not The temperature limits and service intervals shown in
be available in your location. this manual apply to both conventional and synthetic
lubricants.
Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain information and
recommendations. Re-refined base stock products may be used if the
finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
DX,ALTER -19-11APR11-1/1
Lubricant Storage
Your equipment can operate at top efficiency only when
clean lubricants are used. Make certain that all containers are properly marked to
identify their contents.
Use clean containers to handle all lubricants.
Properly dispose of all old containers and any residual
Store lubricants and containers in an area protected from lubricant they may contain.
dust, moisture, and other contamination. Store containers
on their side to avoid water and dirt accumulation.
DX,LUBST -19-11APR11-1/1
Mixing of Lubricants
In general, avoid mixing different brands or types of oil. Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain specific
Oil manufacturers blend additives in their oils to meet information and recommendations.
certain specifications and performance requirements.
Mixing different oils can interfere with the proper
functioning of these additives and degrade lubricant
performance.
DX,LUBMIX -19-18MAR96-1/1
85-18 041717
PN=184
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Hydraulic Fluid
50 o C 122o F
NOTE: Before filling, make sure of fluid specification
present in the hydraulic system to not to
mix different fluids. 40 o C 104o F
SAE 15W-40
SAE 10W-40
20 o C 68 o F
Other fluids may be used if they are in accordance with at
SAE 10W-30
least one of the following specifications:
SAE 5W-30
10 o C 50 o F
• ISO VG 68, for wide temperature range as:
- ASTM 6158-05 (Fluid HV)
0o C 32 o F
- ISO 11158 (Fluid HV)
- DIN 51524 Part 3 type HVLP
-10 o C 14 o F
-20 o C -4 o F
CQ298938 —UN—06APR15
-30 o C -22 o F
-40 o C -40 o F
SAE 140
86 o F
SAE 85W-140
SAE 90
SAE 80W-90
requirements of:
10 o C 50 o F
• API Service Classification GL-5
0o C 32 o F
SAE 75W-90
-10 o C 14 o F
SAE 75W
-20 o C -4 o F
CQ298934 —UN—31MAR15
-30 o C -22 o F
-40 o C -40 o F
OU90500,00003CB -19-25MAR15-1/1
85-19 041717
PN=185
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Grease
Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and the
expected air temperature range during the service interval.
John Deere SD Polyurea Grease is preferred.
The following greases are also recommended:
• John Deere HD Lithium Complex Grease
• John Deere HD Water Resistant Grease
• John Deere GREASE-GARD™
Other greases may be used if they meet the following:
• NLGI Performance Classification GC-LB
IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickeners are not
TS1673 —UN—31OCT03
compatible with others. Consult your grease
supplier before mixing different types of grease.
85-20 041717
PN=186
Lubrication, Maintenance, and Intervals
Required Emission-Related Information
Service Provider
A qualified repair shop or person of the owner's choosing may maintain, replace, or repair emission control devices and systems with original or
equivalent replacement parts. However, warranty, recall, and all other services paid for by John Deere must be performed at an authorized John
Deere service center.
DX,EMISSIONS,REQINFO -19-12JUN15-1/1
Service Your Harvester at Specified Intervals Perform service on items at multiples of the original
Perform lubrication, checks, and adjustments at intervals requirement. For example, at 1000 hours also service
specified in the following tables. those items listed under every 500 hours, every 250
hours, every 100 hours, and every 25 hours or daily.
OU90500,00003DE -19-30MAR15-1/1
Parts Catalog enter your model number. From there, you are able to
view the entire catalog or generate a parts list as required
To access the web-based parts catalog, go to in some markets.
https://jdparts.deere.com, select your language, and then
WM05597,000114D -19-10NOV14-1/1
90-1 041717
PN=187
Lubrication, Maintenance, and Intervals
T8T1981 —UN—08MAY15
1— Secondary Extractor 7— Engine Compartment 13— Base Cutter 20— Cart Guard
2— Elevator 8— Cab 14— Butt-Lifter Roller 21— Elevator Discharge Flap
3— Primary Extractor 9— Topper 15— Feed Rollers 22— Base Cutter Lift and Floating
4— Tie Down Points (3 areas) 10— Crop Dividers/Scrolls 16— Chopper Box Crop Divider Accumulators
5— Lights (4 areas) 11— Upper Knockdown Roller 17— Tow Loops
6— Air Intake Screens 12— Lower Knockdown Roller 18— Basket
19— Chopper Flywheel
WM05597,00010D4 -19-05FEB15-1/1
AS09261,000009D -19-24AUG16-1/1
90-2 041717
PN=188
Lubrication, Maintenance, and Intervals
WM05597,00013F3 -19-08DEC15-1/1
WM05597,00013A7 -19-03SEP15-1/1
90-3 041717
PN=189
Lubrication, Maintenance, and Intervals
90-4 041717
PN=190
Lubrication, Maintenance, and Intervals
WM05597,00013F9 -19-11DEC15-1/1
OU90500,00003D4 -19-25MAR15-1/1
WM05597,000138A -19-13AUG15-1/1
WM05597,00013B0 -19-10SEP15-1/1
90-5 041717
PN=191
Fluids Analysis
Fluids Sample Collecting Schedule (If
Applicable)
IMPORTANT: Use the fluids sample collecting
schedule only if applicable in your region.
Important Considerations
The accessories for the sample collection of fluids vary
from one region to another. Before performing the sample
collection, verify the accessories available.
T81389 —UN—28JUN13
OU90500,000031E -19-04NOV14-1/1
95-1 PN=192
041717
Fluids Analysis
CQ294506 —UN—30APR13
CQ294507 —UN—30APR13
than the dipstick.
2. Attach one end of the hose (A) to the pump body (B)
and then tighten the nut (C).
3. Install the bottle (D) by turning it clockwise.
NOTE: The end of the hose (A) must have a minimum
length "X" inside the bottle (D) so that it
does not stay entirely in.
CQ294501 —UN—30APR13
5. Operate the pump (C) manually for the oil to be
sucked. If the oil is not sucked in, push the hose (A) a
little more into the tube (B).
IMPORTANT: Never turn the pump (C) upside down,
keep it in an upright position. Failure to observe
this procedure may cause its contamination.
OU90500,0000016 -19-11JUN13-2/5
6. When the bottle (A) is full, loosen the nut (B) for air to
enter and the oil stops from being sucked.
7. Remove the hose from the dipstick tube.
NOTE: Be very careful when removing the hose so
you do not spill any oil on the ground.
CQ294508 —UN—30APR13
CQ294509 —UN—30APR13
8. Remove the bottle (A) from the pump body by turning
it counterclockwise.
NOTE: After removing the bottle (A), store the pump
properly, ensuring its no contamination.
95-2 041717
PN=193
Fluids Analysis
10. With the pump (A) in the vertical position, push the
hose (B) down and wipe all traces of oil.
11. Turn the pump (A) 180°, and wipe all traces of oil again.
12. Pull out the hose (B) to outside the pump (A).
CQ294510 —UN—30APR13
CQ294511 —UN—30APR13
OU90500,0000016 -19-11JUN13-4/5
CQ294513 —UN—30APR13
CQ294512 —UN—30APR13
15. Place the bottle (D) into the bag (C) so that it is facing
up (standing).
16. Deliver the sample collected to your John Deere
dealer's service department, and the dealer will send
the sample to the laboratory for analysis.
OU90500,0000016 -19-11JUN13-5/5
1. Attach one end of the hose (A) to the pump body (B)
CQ294507 —UN—30APR13
CQ294503 —UN—30APR13
and then tighten the nut (C).
2. Install the bottle (D) by turning it clockwise.
NOTE: The end of the hose (A) must have a minimum
length "X" inside the bottle (D) so that it
does not stay entirely in.
95-3 041717
PN=194
Fluids Analysis
5. When the bottle (A) is full, loosen the nut (B) for air to
enter and the oil stops from being sucked.
6. Remove the hose from the filler nozzle.
NOTE: Be very careful when removing the hose so
you do not spill any oil on the ground.
CQ294508 —UN—30APR13
CQ294509 —UN—30APR13
7. Remove the bottle (A) from the pump body by turning
it counterclockwise.
NOTE: After removing the bottle (A), store the pump
properly, ensuring its no contamination.
CQ294510 —UN—30APR13
CQ294511 —UN—30APR13
OU90500,0000017 -19-11JUN13-3/4
CQ294512 —UN—30APR13
14. Place the bottle (D) into the bag (C) so that it is facing
up (standing).
15. Deliver the sample collected to your John Deere
dealer's service department, and the dealer will send
the sample to the laboratory for analysis.
OU90500,0000017 -19-11JUN13-4/4
95-4 041717
PN=195
Fluids Analysis
1. Attach one end of the hose (A) to the pump body (B)
CQ294507 —UN—30APR13
CQ294504 —UN—30APR13
and then tighten the nut (C).
2. Install the bottle (D) by turning it clockwise.
NOTE: The end of the hose (A) must have a minimum
length "X" inside the bottle (D) so that it
does not stay entirely in.
5. When the bottle (A) is full, loosen the nut (B) for air to
enter and the fluid stops from being sucked.
6. Remove the hose from the relief fitting.
NOTE: Be very careful when removing the hose so you
do not spill any fluid on the ground. CQ294508 —UN—30APR13
CQ294509 —UN—30APR13
7. Remove the bottle (A) from the pump body by turning
it counterclockwise.
NOTE: After removing the bottle (A), store the pump
properly, ensuring its no contamination.
OU90500,0000018 -19-11JUN13-2/4
CQ294511 —UN—30APR13
95-5 041717
PN=196
Fluids Analysis
CQ294513 —UN—30APR13
CQ294512 —UN—30APR13
14. Place the bottle (D) into the bag (C) so that it is facing
up (standing).
15. Deliver the sample collected to your John Deere
dealer's service department, and the dealer will send
the sample to the laboratory for analysis.
OU90500,0000018 -19-11JUN13-4/4
CQ294502 —UN—21MAY13
1. Attach one end of the hose (A) to the pump body (B)
and then tighten the nut (C).
2. Install the bottle (D) by turning it clockwise.
NOTE: The end of the hose (A) must have a minimum
length "X" inside the bottle (D) so that it
does not stay entirely in.
3. Insert the hose (A) into the filler nozzle (E) of the
coolant recovery tank so that the hose penetrates 50
mm (1.9 in.) the coolant level.
IMPORTANT: Handle the hose (A) carefully avoiding
its contact with any part of the harvester, and
CQ294505 —UN—30APR13
thus contaminating the coolant.
95-6 041717
PN=197
Fluids Analysis
5. When the bottle (A) is full, loosen the nut (B) for air to
enter and the coolant stops from being sucked.
6. Remove the hose from the coolant recovery tank.
NOTE: Be very careful when removing the hose so you
do not spill any coolant on the ground.
CQ294508 —UN—30APR13
CQ294509 —UN—30APR13
7. Remove the bottle (A) from the pump body by turning
it counterclockwise.
NOTE: After removing the bottle (A), store the pump
properly, ensuring it's no contamination.
CQ294510 —UN—30APR13
CQ294511 —UN—30APR13
OU90500,0000019 -19-11JUN13-4/5
CQ294512 —UN—30APR13
14. Place the bottle (D) into the bag (C) so that it is facing
up (standing).
15. Deliver the sample collected to your John Deere
dealer's service department, and the dealer will send
the sample to the laboratory for analysis.
OU90500,0000019 -19-11JUN13-5/5
95-7 041717
PN=198
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter
NOTE: Reference the Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
section for the changing oil and filter service intervals.
T8T5004 —UN—16NOV16
IMPORTANT: Machine must be slightly tilted forward
when draining oil. If machine is on base
cutter safety stops, it is tilted up causing
old oil to remain in pan.
T8T5044 —UN—18NOV16
4. Remove engine oil drain hose (D) from the hose cap
assembly (E).
100-1 041717
PN=199
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
6. Open valve (D) on the oil pan (E) and allow oil to drain
into a container. Venting by removing filler cap lowers
drain time.
T8T5062 —UN—21NOV16
A—Knockdown Roller D—Oil Valve
B—Cap Screw (8 used) E—Oill Pan
C—Access Panel
T8T5061 —UN—21NOV16
Continued on next page AS09261,0000162 -19-21NOV16-2/3
100-2 041717
PN=200
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
T8T1998 —UN—23APR15
T8T1999 —UN—23APR15
Right-Hand Side Of Engine Machine Shown Right-Hand Side Of Engine Machine Shown
NOTE: Dispose of the used oil filter according to within the crosshatch on dipstick, whichever
employer and government guidelines. is present. Do NOT overfill.
7. Open right-hand engine compartment door. 13. Fill engine crankcase with correct John Deere
engine oil through the oil filler tube on the left-hand
8. Remove oil filter (A) and O-ring (B) from the filter side of machine. See Check Engine Oil Level in
housing (C) with a filter wrench or strap. Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily.
Drain oil filter housing for 30 s. Discard oil filter and Specification
O-ring. Engine Crankcase—Ca-
pacity.............................................................................................. 33.3 L
IMPORTANT: Filtration of oils is critical to proper
(8.8 gal)
operation and lubrication. Always change
filter regularly. Only use filter meeting John IMPORTANT: Immediately after completing any
Deere performance specifications. oil change, crank engine for 30 s without
permitting engine to start. This helps
9. Retain engine oil drain hose to hose cap assembly. insure adequate lubrication to the engine
10. Clean inside of the filter housing. components before engine starts.
11. Apply clean oil to O-ring on the new oil filter and install 14. After start-up, check low oil pressure indicator light
on the filter housing. and check filter for possible leaks.
12. Tighten filter by hand until seal contacts housing, then 15. Stop engine and check oil level after 10 min. Oil level
tighten 1/4—1/2 turn more. reading must be within crosshatch or at the upper
mark of the dipstick.
NOTE: Crankcase oil capacity varies slightly.
ALWAYS fill the crankcase to the full mark or
AS09261,0000162 -19-21NOV16-3/3
100-3 PN=201
041717
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
T8T317 —UN—01MAY14
O-ring when removing filter cover.
3. Remove and retain cap screws (C) and slowly lift filter
cover. Make sure no trash blows into tank while cover
is removed.
4. Remove filter assemblies.
5. Replace cover on tank to keep out trash.
6. Remove and retain nut, retainer, and spring (D) on
lower end of insert assembly. Slide filter (E) from rod
assembly (F).
T8130003034 —UN—02DEC13
7. Clean magnet (G) and inspect filter seals.
IMPORTANT: If hydraulic filters that do not meet
factory specifications are used, the warranty
of hydraulic components will be voided.
T8130003035 —UN—02DEC13
reservoir and tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Filter Cover Cap
Screws—Torque............................................................................49 N·m
(36 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000F6A -19-05FEB15-1/1
100-4 041717
PN=202
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
CQ298943 —UN—08APR15
NOTE: Catch fluids with an approved container
and dispose of according to employer and
government guidelines.
100-5 041717
PN=203
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
T8T3539 —UN—15JAN16
T8T402 —UN—24APR15
Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
T8T5022 —UN—16NOV16
3. Remove drain hose (F) from the hose cap assembly
(G).
NOTE: Machine has extra hose length to drain oil into
an approved container. Verify hose routing when
draining oil so that all oil is removed from the oil
pan. Care must be taken when replacing excess
hose back into engine compartment. Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
AS09261,0000163 -19-21NOV16-1/1
100-6 041717
PN=204
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
T8T2443 —UN—06MAY15
2. Run engine, with chopper engaged, approximately 5
min to warm gear case oil.
3. Set park brake, shut OFF engine, and remove key.
Wait for harvesting functions to stop.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to damage or lose Chopper Gear Case (Style A)
O-ring when removing drain plug.
T8T4955 —UN—10NOV16
IMPORTANT: Verify that O-ring stays seated
when installing drain plug.
Specification 10. Start engine, engage chopper, and allow to run for
Chopper Gear Case several minutes.
(Style A)—Capacity.......................................................................... 6.6 L
11. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait 10 min and
(1.75 gal)
check oil level at sight gauge. Add oil as necessary.
Chopper Gear Case
(Style B)—Capacity........................................................................... 13 L
(3.4 gal)
100-7 041717
PN=205
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
NW271330 —UN—15MAY06
2. Run engine, with the base cutter engaged,
approximately 5 minutes to warm gear case oil.
3. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait for harvesting
functions to stop completely.
4. Remove cap screws (A) and rubber side shield (B).
5. Remove gear case drain plug (C) and leg drain plugs
(D). Allow oil to drain completely.
NOTE: Dispose of waste oil according to all employer
and government environmental guidelines.
T8130000130 —UN—17JAN13
A—Cap Screws (3 used per C—Gear Case Drain Plug
side) D—Leg Drain Plugs
B—Rubber Shield
AS09261,00001DB -19-22MAR17-1/2
7. Remove the fill plug (A) from the top of gear case.
8. Fill gear case with 85W140 oil. Allow time for oil to
settle.
9. Check oil level at sight gauge. Level must be 3/4 of
T8130000196 —UN—18JAN13
sight gauge.
Specification
CH570 Base Cutter
Gear Case (Style
A)—Capacity.................................................................................... 9.5 L
(2.5 gal)
Specification
CH670 Base Cutter
Gear Case (Style
A—Fill Plug
A)—Capacity.................................................................................. 13.5 L
(3.5 gal)
Specification
11. Start engine, engage base cutter, and allow to run for
Base Cutter Gear Case
several minutes.
(Style B)—Capacity............................................................................. 7 L
(1.87 gal) 12. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait 10 minutes and
check oil level at sight gauge. Add oil as necessary.
10. Reinstall fill plug, rubber shield, and cap screws.
AS09261,00001DB -19-22MAR17-2/2
100-8 041717
PN=206
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
T8T789 —UN—14JUL14
final drive oil at specified intervals, take a fluid
sample. See Oilscan™ and CoolScan™ in Fuel,
Lubricants, and Coolant section.
For cane harvesters that frequently self-transport
between fields, traveling at high speeds for
longer than average periods, or operating for
time periods longer than 10 hours per day, it
is necessary to change the final drive oil more A—Drain Plug C—Fill Plug
frequently to avoid breakdown and damage to B—Level Check Plug
the final drive components.
Make sure that oil is warm before changing.
IMPORTANT: Overfilling a final drive is as harmful as
1. Rotate final drive until drain plug (A) is at six o'clock low oil. Too much oil can cause overheating
position and check plug (B) is at four o’clock position. and damage the final drive.
2. Remove fill plug (C), check plug, and drain plug 6. Wait until the oil stops flowing from opening and
and allow oil to drain into an appropriate container. reinstall check and fill plug.
Dispose of oil according to employer and government
guidelines. 7. Repeat process on opposite side of machine.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to lose O-rings on plugs. 8. Tighten plugs to specification.
Specification
3. Install drain plug.
Final Drive Fill
4. Add oil through fill plug opening. Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
(22 lb.-ft.)
NOTE: Gear oil is thick, allow time for oil to Final Drive Check
settle when filling. Plug—Torque.................................................................................12 N·m
(106 lb.-in.)
5. Continue filling final drive until oil flows out of check Final Drive Drain
plug. Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
Specification (22 lb.-ft.)
Final Drive
Oil—Capacity................................................................................... 3.0 L
(0.8 gal.)
WM05597,00012CB -19-21APR15-1/1
WM05597,00011C1 -19-14JAN15-1/1
100-9 PN=207
041717
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
T8130000149 —UN—22JAN13
1. Completely lower harvester. Put a stand under the
elevator swing table.
2. Slowly raise harvester until track slightly lifts off the
ground.
T8130000230 —UN—22JAN13
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-2/7
100-10 041717
PN=208
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
T8130000232 —UN—22JAN13
Rear Axle Inner
Nut—Torque............................................................. 814 N·m (600 lb.-ft.)
A—Tool
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-4/7
CQ282552 —UN—01DEC08
11. Tighten cap screws (B) to specification.
Specification
Outer Nut Cap
Screws—Torque........................................................... 50 N·m (37 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-5/7
T8130000233 —UN—22JAN13
100-11 041717
PN=209
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
T8130000234 —UN—22JAN13
T8130000235 —UN—22JAN13
A—Silicon B—Cover
C—Cap Screws (6 used)
100-12 PN=210
041717
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
Clean Machine Using Compressed Air Clean machine using compressed air: cooling package,
IMPORTANT: In dusty conditions, check daily. muffler area, platform, hydraulic area, air conditioning
recirculation filter, air conditioning condenser, engine
NOTE: When using compressed air to clean out compartment, radiator, oil cooler, and hydraulic oil cooler.
components, blow air opposite the normal direction
See Machine Cleanout section.
of airflow. Blowing air in same direction of normal
airflow can force debris further into a component.
WM05597,00011C0 -19-06FEB15-1/1
T8T182 —UN—16APR14
is BELOW the add mark.
T8T1776 —UN—07JAN15
4. If necessary, add oil at the fill tube (C).
WM05597,00013B1 -19-10SEP15-1/1
105-1 041717
PN=211
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
T8T179 —UN—16APR14
NOTE: Platform must be level, elevator in the raised
position and the topper all the way down. Allow 30
minutes for oil to level after shutting down the engine.
T8T181 —UN—16APR14
NOTE: Verify engine coolant level at expansion
tank (A) through shield.
A—Expansion Tank
Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III
WM05597,00013B2 -19-10SEP15-1/1
WM05597,0000E96 -19-05FEB15-1/1
105-2 041717
PN=212
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
Inspect Blades
Inspect Blades on: Base Cutter, Chopper, Topper,
Primary Extractor, Secondary Extractor (If Equipped),
and Side Knives (If Equipped).
T8T2925 —UN—12AUG15
A—Base Cutter Blade (10 used) C—Topper Blade (8 used) E—Secondary Extractor Blade (3
B—Chopper Blade (8 used) D—Primary Extractor Blade (4 used)
used)
CAUTION: Avoid possible serious injury or 5. Inspect topper blades (C) for damage and wear.
death. Shut OFF engine and wait for harvesting Replace as necessary (see Remove and Install
functions to stop completely. Remove key Topper Blades in Maintenance—As Required section).
and turn OFF battery disconnect switch If equipped, inspect shredder topper shear plate
before inspecting blades. clearance. Adjust as necessary (see Adjust Shredder
Topper Shear Plates (If Equipped) in Maintenance—As
Avoid possible serious injury from sharp edges. Required section).
Wear gloves when handling blades.
6. Inspect primary extractor blades (D) for damage and
1. Completely raise base cutter and lower topper boom. wear. Replace as necessary (see Inspect Primary
Extractor Fan Assembly).
2. Engage base cutter safety stops.
7. If equipped, inspect secondary extractor blades (E) for
3. Inspect base cutter blades (A) for damage and wear. damage and wear. Replace as necessary (see your
Replace as necessary (see Remove and Install Base authorized John Deere dealer).
Cutter Blades in Maintenance—As Required section).
8. If equipped, inspect side knife blades for damage and
4. Inspect chopper blades (B) for damage and wear. wear. Replace if necessary (see Remove and Install
Replace as necessary (see Remove and Install Side Knife Blades (If Equipped) in Maintenance—As
Chopper Blades in Maintenance—As Required Required section).
section).
AS09261,000009F -19-04AUG16-1/1
Check Lights
Inspect all lights and light harnesses for damage and
tightness. Clean area around connectors and verify all
lights function properly.
WM05597,00011C4 -19-06FEB15-1/1
105-3 041717
PN=213
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
Check Hydraulic System If hoses must be fabricated, ensure that hoses are the
Check hydraulic system for leaks, missing/loose same rating as one being replaced. See your John Deere
clamps, or damage. dealer for correct hose rating replacements.
Clean area around connections and cylinders. Incorrect hose length or routing increases chance of hose
wear or damage. Use old hose as guide for length and
Hydraulic hoses must be inspected frequently for leakage, hose routing.
kinking, cuts, cracks, abrasion, corrosion, exposed wire
braid, or any other signs of wear or damage. Worn or Incorrect fittings can damage mating parts or cause leaks
damaged hose assemblies can fail during use and must make sure to use steel fittings approved for use with
be replaced immediately. See your John Deere dealer for hose manufacture. Use correct size and thread type as
replacement hoses. replaced hose.
T8T548 —UN—10JUN14
Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III
IMPORTANT: The air intake system must not leak. 2. Verify all clamps (A) are in place and tight. Tighten
Any leak, no matter how small, may result in clamps to specification.
internal engine damage due to abrasive dirt
and dust entering the intake system. Specification
Clamps—Torque..............................................................................9 N·m
The engine air intake system is on the left-hand side of (80 lb·in)
cooling tower.
3. Verify engine air pre-cleaner (B) has proper air
1. Inspect all piping for leaks or damage. movement, clean screens, and no damage.
WM05597,00013B3 -19-10SEP15-1/1
105-4 PN=214
041717
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
T8130000348 —UN—24JAN13
If rotor is not spinning it must be replaced.
KR43067,0000CE5 -19-25JAN13-1/1
T8130000347 —UN—24JAN13
3. Wipe inner screen (B) clean.
4. Reattach outer screen around pre-cleaner.
KR43067,0000CE4 -19-25JAN13-1/1
T8140000405 —UN—24APR14
CQ298948 —UN—15APR15
Left-Hand Side Of Engine Compartment Shown Right-Hand Side Of Engine Compartment Shown
A—Fitting B—Fitting
IMPORTANT: Wipe grease fittings clean before and 1. Grease fitting (A) at top of cylinder on right-hand side
after lubricating. If grease fitting is damaged of machine.
or missing, replace immediately.
2. Grease fitting (B) at top of cylinder on left-hand side
of machine.
Continued on next page WM05597,00013F0 -19-08DEC15-1/3
105-5 041717
PN=215
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
T8130000110 —UN—15JAN13
T8T3384 —UN—08DEC15
Style A Style B
A—Fittings (4 or 2 used)
T8130000140 —UN—24JAN13
T8T1565 —UN—11NOV14
105-6 041717
PN=216
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
A—Fittings (3 used)
T8T3377 —UN—29OCT15
WM05597,00013CF -19-29OCT15-1/1
A—Fittings (2 used)
T8T1236 —UN—23SEP14
WM05597,00011CA -19-06FEB15-1/1
105-7 041717
PN=217
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
T8140000373 —UN—17MAR14
T8T665 —UN—27JUN14
A—Fittings (4 used) B—Fittings (2 used)
1. Grease fittings (A) at machine end of boom. 2. Grease fittings (B) at topper end of boom.
WM05597,00011CB -19-06FEB15-1/1
T8T2436 —UN—28APR15
1. Grease fittings (A) on crop divider mounting pins. 3. Grease fitting (C) on upper crop divider linkage.
Repeat on other crop divider. Repeat on other crop divider.
2. Grease fittings (B) on cylinder ends. Repeat on other 4. Grease fitting (D) on lower crop divider linkage.
crop divider.
Repeat on other crop divider.
WM05597,00011CD -19-28APR15-1/1
105-8 041717
PN=218
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
T8T2437 —UN—28APR15
Some Parts Removed For Clarity
A—Fittings (6 used) B—Fittings (6 used) C—Fittings (2 used)
1. Grease fittings (A) on crop divider mounting pins. 3. Grease fitting (C) on lower crop divider linkage.
Repeat on other crop divider. Repeat on other crop divider.
2. Grease fittings (B) on cylinder ends. Repeat on other
crop divider.
WM05597,00011CE -19-28APR15-1/1
WM05597,00011CF -19-06FEB15-1/1
105-9 041717
PN=219
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
A—Fittings (5 used)
T8T2955 —UN—08SEP15
WM05597,00013AB -19-08SEP15-1/1
T8130000359 —UN—24JAN13
T8130000116 —UN—15JAN13
1. Grease fitting (A) on secondary extractor motor. 2. Grease fitting (B) located below secondary extractor
NOTE: Turn secondary extractor by hand while greasing. hood. Repeat on opposite side.
WM05597,00011D1 -19-06FEB15-1/1
105-10 041717
PN=220
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
T8T2956 —UN—08SEP15
T8130000114 —UN—25JAN13
NOTE: In dusty or when harvesting burnt cane, these 4. Grease fitting (D) on top of upper swing table pin.
fittings must be lubricated every 10 h. Extra grease
may be required to flush out contaminants. 5. Grease fitting (E) on bottom of lower swing table pin.
6. Grease fittings (F) on cable mounting pin. Repeat on
1. Grease fittings (A) on right-hand elevator swing opposite side of machine.
cylinder.
NOTE: Rotate swing table side to side to verify that
2. Grease fittings (B) on left-hand elevator swing cylinder. the pins are being greased.
3. Grease fitting (C) on bottom of upper swing table pin.
NOTE: Lower elevator to access fitting (D).
WM05597,000137D -19-08SEP15-1/1
WM05597,00011D3 -19-14JAN15-1/1
105-11 041717
PN=221
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
T8T662 —UN—26JUN14
A—Fittings (2 used) B—Fittings (2 used) C—Fittings (2 used)
T8T402 —UN—24APR15
NOTE: Always check the pump drive gear case oil 1. Check oil level at sight gauge (A). Oil level must be
level before starting the engine. within the rectangle.
2. Remove fill plug (B) and add oil, as necessary.
WM05597,000141E -19-15JAN16-1/1
105-12 041717
PN=222
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
T8130000830 —UN—21FEB13
T8T1742 —UN—03DEC14
Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown Left-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
IMPORTANT: Always check fluid level when oil is cold. 3. If necessary, remove and retain cap screws (B) and
rubber shield (C) to access filler plug (D).
1. Park harvester on a level surface.
4. Add oil as necessary.
2. Check sight gauge (A) to verify that oil level is 3/4 of
gauge.
AS09261,000010B -19-28SEP16-1/1
T8T5034 —UN—18NOV16
T8T2444 —UN—06MAY15
Chopper Gear Case (Style A) Oil Level Chopper Gear Case (Style B) Oil Level
A—Sight Gauge
105-13 041717
PN=223
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
T8T790 —UN—14JUL14
fire prevention information.
WM05597,00012D0 -19-22APR15-1/1
105-14 041717
PN=224
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
Inspect Elevator Support Cable
Inspect elevator support cable for signs of wear, frays, or
breaks. Replace elevator support cable if signs of wear
are present.
WM05597,00011D8 -19-06FEB15-1/1
T8140000403 —UN—28APR14
A—Crop Divider Stop (2 used)
WM05597,00011D9 -19-06FEB15-1/1
T8130000826 —UN—21FEB13
A—Feed Roller Cradle Stop (5
used per side)
WM05597,00011DA -19-06FEB15-1/1
T8140000408 —UN—22SEP14
A—Elevator Bumper Stop (2
used)
WM05597,00011DB -19-06FEB15-1/1
110-1 041717
PN=225
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
CQ298947 —UN—15APR15
elements then, or after the normal service
interval, whichever comes first.
Drain water from fuel filters as often as necessary.
Capture water and any fuel in an approved
container and dispose of properly.
If water is sensed in the fuel system, a diagnostic trouble Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III
code is generated.
If a diagnostic trouble code appears, drain fuel filters A—Drain Valves C—Secondary Fuel Filter
B—Primary Fuel Filter D—Prefilter
using drain valves (A) and reset code.
1. Open left-hand engine compartment door. Fuel filters
are on inside of left-hand engine compartment door. 3. Close engine compartment door.
NOTE: Catch fluids with an approved container NOTE: To replace fuel filter elements, see Replace
and dispose of according to employer and Fuel Filters (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage
government guidelines. III) and Replace Prefilter Element (Tier 2/Stage
II and Tier 3/Stage III) in Maintenance—Every
2. Open drain valves (A) at base of primary fuel filter (B), 1500 Hours section.
secondary fuel filter (C), and prefilter (D) (if equipped)
until water has drained. Tighten valves.
WM05597,00013B4 -19-10SEP15-1/1
T8T789 —UN—14JUL14
NOTE: It is recommended that the final drive oil level
be checked every 50 hours.
Check oil level when oil is cold.
3. Remove fill plug (C), if necessary, and add oil until oil
begins to flow from check plug opening.
Specification
IMPORTANT: Overfilling a final drive is as harmful as Final Drive Fill
low oil. Too much oil can cause overheating Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
and damage the final drive. (22 lb.-ft.)
Final Drive Check
4. Wait until the oil stops flowing from opening and Plug—Torque.................................................................................12 N·m
reinstall check and fill plug. (106 lb.-in.)
Final Drive Drain
5. Repeat process on opposite side of machine.
Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
6. If removed, tighten plugs to specification. (22 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000FF9 -19-06JAN15-1/1
110-2 PN=226
041717
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
NW271000 —UN—15MAY06
by extractors difficult.
• Stalks are not cut completely into billets.
Check Timing
T8T1485 —UN—16OCT14
shown. Upper drum assembly (A) blades leads the
lower blades as the cane is cut into billets.
110-3 041717
PN=227
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
T8T5040 —UN—18NOV16
T8T2448 —UN—07MAY15
Chopper Flywheel (Style A) Chopper Flywheel (Style B)
6. Rotate flywheel (A) clockwise and observe
blade-to-blade contact. Drums must rotate smoothly.
7. Apply a light coat of quick-dry spray paint to the
blade-to-blade contact surfaces (B) of each blade.
8. Rotate flywheel clockwise and allow upper and lower
blades (C and D) to contact one another. Paint
scratched or removed from blades shows blade
contact pattern. Optimal blade-to-blade contact is
when blades touch along entire length of the blade
without the excessive impact.
T8T2277 —UN—23MAR15
A—Flywheel C—Upper Blade (as required)
B—Blade-to-Blade Contact D—Lower Blade (as required)
Surfaces
110-4 041717
PN=228
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
Adjust Timing
T8T2449 —UN—07MAY15
T8T2453 —UN—07MAY15
Chopper Gear Case (Style A) Chopper Drive Gear (Style A)
T8T5036 —UN—18NOV16
T8T5037 —UN—18NOV16
Chopper Gear Case Cover (Style B) Chopper Drive Gear (Style B)
1. Remove cap screws (B) and upper drive gear cover 5. When blade contact is correct, tighten cap screws (D
(C). and E).
IMPORTANT: Cover opening when possible to avoid 6. Manually rotate the flywheel (A) clockwise and check
gear case oil contamination. chopper blade timing. Repeat adjustment steps if
necessary.
2. Loosen cap screws (D and E).
7. After correct timing is achieved, tighten cap screws
3. From the rear of machine, manually turn upper to specification.
chopper barrel until upper and lower blades make
proper contact. Specification
Chopper Gear Case
NOTE: Slotted holes in upper drive gear are used (Style A) Cap Screws (D
to adjust chopper timing. and E)—Torque...........................................................................520 N·m
(383 lb·ft)
4. Adjust upper drive gear to obtain smooth Chopper Gear Case
blade-to-blade contact along the length of each blade. (Style B) Cap Screws (D
and E)—Torque...........................................................................427 N·m
a. Using a rubber mallet, tap adjustment lever
(315 lb·ft)
counterclockwise until cap screws contact end of
slots in gear, or as close as possible. 8. Check gear case oil level and fill with recommended
b. Tighten two opposing cap screws in gear. oil as necessary. See Check Chopper Gear Case
Oil Level in Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
NOTE: If further adjustment is needed, remove cap section.
screw in slotted end of the adjustment lever
and install into position (F). NOTE: If necessary, use a new upper drive
gear cover gasket.
c. Repeat steps necessary to check blade contact.
Continued on next page AS09261,000016B -19-22NOV16-3/4
110-5 PN=229
041717
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
T8T2451 —UN—07MAY15
T8T2452 —UN—07MAY15
Chopper Flywheel (Style A) Chopper Flywheel (Style A)
T8T5038 —UN—18NOV16
T8T5039 —UN—18NOV16
Chopper Flywheel (Style B) Chopper Flywheel (Style B)
NOTE: Some parts have been removed for clarity. 2. Remove and retain hardware (A) and clutch cover (B).
3. Remove and retain the flywheel clutch nut (C).
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death. Shut
OFF engine, remove key and place warning tag IMPORTANT: Apply Thread Lock and Sealer
on steering wheel not to start machine. Wait (Medium Strength) to threads of the flywheel
for harvesting functions to stop completely clutch nut before installing.
before servicing chopper assembly.
4. Tighten flywheel clutch nut until it contacts washers.
IMPORTANT: Overtightening of the slip clutch Tighten nut an additional 2-1/2 turns.
causes premature failure of chopper, gears,
shaft, bearings, and seals. IMPORTANT: Apply Thread Lock and Sealer
(Medium Strength) to threads of hardware
Allowing too much slip causes chopper to before installing.
choke and slip clutch to wear out.
5. Install clutch cover and hardware. Close chopper gear
1. Open chopper gear case door. case door.
AS09261,000016C -19-22NOV16-1/1
110-6 041717
PN=230
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
X9811 —UN—23AUG88
T8T510 —UN—29MAY14
CAUTION: Use care when relieving grease from
chain tension adjusting cylinders. Grease
under pressure can penetrate the skin. Wear
appropriate safety apparel and eye protection.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately.
Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically
T8T509 —UN—29MAY14
removed within a few hours or gangrene
may result. Doctors unfamiliar with this type
of injury should reference a knowledgeable
medical source. Such information is available
from Deere & Company Medical Department
in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
Chain Tension Adjustment Location (right-hand side shown)
IMPORTANT: Cylinders on both sides must
be adjusted equally so that slats remain
perpendicular to elevator side wall.
T8T3387 —UN—08DEC15
It is not necessary to loosen cap screws (I) to
adjust chain tension. Plate assemblies (D) slide
on elevator frame to allow chain adjustment.
• To increase chain tension (E): pump an equal increased equally to maintain proper movement of
amount of grease into fitting (G) on each side chain slats along elevator side walls.
of elevator. Cylinders must have chain tension
Continued on next page WM05597,00013F2 -19-08DEC15-1/2
110-7 041717
PN=231
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
• To decrease chain tension (H): slowly open valve 2. Start engine and operate elevator at a slow speed.
(F) and allow grease to escape from tension cylinder. Check for smooth operation.
Cylinders must have tension released equally on
each side of the elevator. 3. Shut off engine. If necessary, repeat procedure until
elevator chain assembly operates smoothly and
without binding.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury and equipment
damage. Ensure that all personnel and
tools are removed from elevator area before
testing elevator operation.
WM05597,00013F2 -19-08DEC15-2/2
A—Safety Stop
T8T1636 —UN—21NOV14
WM05597,00011DC -19-06FEB15-1/1
A—Safety Stop
T8T1635 —UN—21NOV14
WM05597,00011DD -19-06FEB15-1/1
A—Safety Stop
T8T2953 —UN—03SEP15
WM05597,00013A6 -19-03SEP15-1/1
110-8 041717
PN=232
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours
Change Final Drive Oil
IMPORTANT:
• Verify that only recommended oil is used.
See Final Drive Gear Oil in Fuel, Lubricants,
and Coolant section.
•
T8T789 —UN—14JUL14
For wheel machine or two-speed track
machine, change oil every 100 hours.
For one-speed track machine, change
oil every 250 hours.
115-1 PN=233
041717
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours
T8130000311 —UN—29JAN13
IMPORTANT: If mounting hardware is loose, clean,
apply Thread Lock and Sealer (High Strength)
and tighten to specification.
Specification
Mounting
Hardware—Torque......................................................................427 N·m
(315 lb.-ft.)
Tracks Removed For Clarity
A—Mounting Hardware (18
used)
WM05597,00011DE -19-06FEB15-1/1
T8130000312 —UN—29JAN13
A—Hardware (4 used per slat) B—Elevator Slat
WM05597,00011DF -19-06FEB15-1/1
115-2 041717
PN=234
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours
T8130000314 —UN—30JAN13
T8130000315 —UN—30JAN13
T8130000316 —UN—31JAN13
T8T2928 —UN—12AUG15
A—Chain C—Isolator Mounts (4 used) E—Blades and Hardware (4 sets
B—Mounting Hardware (6 used) D—Hydraulic and Electrical used)
Connections
115-3 041717
PN=235
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours
T8T2929 —UN—12AUG15
9. Place opening (B) of supplied gauge (C) over blade at
location (A) on all four blades.
10. Blade life is determined by how far gauge goes over
blade.
Green Area (D) Blades are in good condition.
No replacement needed.
Yellow Area (E) Blades are in acceptable condition.
Replacement needed soon.
Red Area (F) Blades are fully worn. Replace
blades now.
T8T2898 —UN—22JUL15
Install Primary Extractor Fan Blades.
AS09261,00000A0 -19-04AUG16-2/2
115-4 PN=236
041717
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Change Final Drive Oil
IMPORTANT:
• Verify that only recommended oil is used.
See Final Drive Gear Oil in Fuel, Lubricants,
and Coolant section.
•
T8T789 —UN—14JUL14
For wheel machine or two-speed track
machine, change oil every 100 hours.
For one-speed track machine, change
oil every 250 hours.
120-1 PN=237
041717
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
T8130000149 —UN—22JAN13
1. Completely lower harvester. Put a stand under the
elevator swing table.
2. Slowly raise harvester until track slightly lifts off the
ground.
T8130000230 —UN—22JAN13
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-2/7
120-2 041717
PN=238
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
T8130000232 —UN—22JAN13
Rear Axle Inner
Nut—Torque............................................................. 814 N·m (600 lb.-ft.)
A—Tool
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-4/7
CQ282552 —UN—01DEC08
11. Tighten cap screws (B) to specification.
Specification
Outer Nut Cap
Screws—Torque........................................................... 50 N·m (37 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-5/7
T8130000233 —UN—22JAN13
120-3 041717
PN=239
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
T8130000234 —UN—22JAN13
T8130000235 —UN—22JAN13
A—Silicon B—Cover
C—Cap Screws (6 used)
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-7/7
T8T311 —UN—28APR14
Apply ONLY three pumps from a hand grease
applicator to avoid damaging bearing seal.
120-4 PN=240
041717
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
A—Fitting (2 used)
T8140000409 —UN—22SEP14
WM05597,00011F3 -19-06FEB15-1/1
T8120002659 —UN—22JAN13
WM05597,00011C1 -19-14JAN15-1/1
120-5 041717
PN=241
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
T8T5064 —UN—22NOV16
T8T1564 —UN—11NOV14
Left-Hand Side Of Machine Shown Upper Drum
T8T5063 —UN—22NOV16
A—Fittings (2 used) C—Grease
B—Grease
Lower Drum
AS09261,0000172 -19-22NOV16-1/1
A—Fitting
T8T1984 —UN—07MAY15
WM05597,00011F5 -19-06FEB15-1/1
120-6 041717
PN=242
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
A—Fitting
T8T2446 —UN—07MAY15
Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
WM05597,00012E5 -19-07MAY15-1/1
T8T664 —UN—07JUL14
fittings are on each side of machine.
WM05597,00011F7 -19-06FEB15-1/1
120-7 041717
PN=243
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
T8T5004 —UN—16NOV16
IMPORTANT: Machine must be slightly tilted forward
when draining oil. If machine is on base
cutter safety stops, it is tilted up causing
old oil to remain in pan.
T8T5044 —UN—18NOV16
NOTE: Dispose of used oil according to employer
and government guidelines.
4. Remove engine oil drain hose (D) from the hose cap
assembly (E) and drain oil.
5. Venting by removing filler cap lowers drain time.
120-8 041717
PN=244
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
T8T1998 —UN—23APR15
T8T1999 —UN—23APR15
Right-Hand Side Of Engine Machine Shown Right-Hand Side Of Engine Machine Shown
NOTE: Dispose of the used oil filter according to within the crosshatch on dipstick, whichever
employer and government guidelines. is present. Do NOT overfill.
6. Open right-hand engine compartment door. 12. Fill engine crankcase with correct John Deere
engine oil through the oil filler tube on the left-hand
7. Remove oil filter (A) and O-ring (B) from the filter side of machine. See Check Engine Oil Level in
housing (C) with a filter wrench or strap. Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily.
Drain oil filter housing for 30 s. Discard oil filter and Specification
O-ring. Engine Crankcase—Ca-
pacity.............................................................................................. 33.3 L
IMPORTANT: Filtration of oils is critical to proper
(8.8 gal)
operation and lubrication. Always change
filter regularly. Only use filter meeting John IMPORTANT: Immediately after completing any
Deere performance specifications. oil change, crank engine for 30 s without
permitting engine to start. This helps
8. Replace engine oil drain hose to hose cap assembly. insure adequate lubrication to the engine
9. Clean inside of the filter housing. components before engine starts.
10. Apply clean oil to O-ring on the new oil filter and install 13. After start-up, check low oil pressure indicator light
on the filter housing. and check filter for possible leaks.
11. Tighten filter by hand until seal contacts housing, then 14. Stop engine and check oil level after 10 min. Oil level
tighten 1/4—1/2 turn more. reading must be within crosshatch or at the upper
mark of the dipstick.
NOTE: Crankcase oil capacity varies slightly.
ALWAYS fill the crankcase to the full mark or
AS09261,0000166 -19-21NOV16-2/2
120-9 PN=245
041717
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
CQ280291 —UN—09APR08
Visually inspect tensioner stop (A) and fixed stop (B) on
belt tensioner assembly.
If tensioner stop on swing arm is hitting fixed stop, check
mounting brackets (alternator, belt tensioner, and idler
pulley) and the belt length. Replace belt as needed.
WM05597,0000E92 -19-05FEB15-1/1
CQ280292 —UN—09APR08
Measure tensioner spring tension using a torque wrench
and the following steps:
1. Release tension on belt using a long-handle 1/2 inch
breaker bar in tension arm. Remove belt from pulleys.
2. Release tension on tension arm and remove breaker
bar.
3. Put a mark (A) on swing arm of tensioner as shown. A—Mark C—Bore
B—Mark
4. Measure 21 mm (0.83 in.) from mark (A) and put a
mark (B) on tensioner mounting base.
5. Couple a torque wrench to hole (C) and turn rocker Specification
arm until marks (A) and (B) are aligned. Spring—Tension...................................................................... 24-28 N·m
(17-21 lb.-ft.)
6. Record torque wrench measurement and compare with
specification. Replace tensioner assembly as required.
WM05597,0000E94 -19-06FEB15-1/1
120-10 PN=246
041717
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
T8T549 —UN—10JUN14
A—Fuel Tank Breather
Assembly
OU90500,00003BC -19-23MAR15-1/1
120-11 041717
PN=247
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter
NOTE: Reference the Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
section for the changing oil and filter service intervals.
T8T5004 —UN—16NOV16
IMPORTANT: Machine must be slightly tilted forward
when draining oil. If machine is on base
cutter safety stops, it is tilted up causing
old oil to remain in pan.
T8T5044 —UN—18NOV16
NOTE: Dispose of used oil according to employer
and government guidelines.
4. Remove engine oil drain hose (D) from the hose cap
assembly (E) and drain oil.
5. Venting by removing filler cap lowers drain time.
125-1 041717
PN=248
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
T8T1998 —UN—23APR15
T8T1999 —UN—23APR15
Right-Hand Side Of Engine Machine Shown Right-Hand Side Of Engine Machine Shown
NOTE: Dispose of the used oil filter according to within the crosshatch on dipstick, whichever
employer and government guidelines. is present. Do NOT overfill.
6. Open right-hand engine compartment door. 12. Fill engine crankcase with correct John Deere
engine oil through the oil filler tube on the left-hand
7. Remove oil filter (A) and O-ring (B) from the filter side of machine. See Check Engine Oil Level in
housing (C) with a filter wrench or strap. Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily.
Drain oil filter housing for 30 s. Discard oil filter and Specification
O-ring. Engine Crankcase—Ca-
pacity.............................................................................................. 33.3 L
IMPORTANT: Filtration of oils is critical to proper
(8.8 gal)
operation and lubrication. Always change
filter regularly. Only use filter meeting John IMPORTANT: Immediately after completing any
Deere performance specifications. oil change, crank engine for 30 s without
permitting engine to start. This helps
8. Replace engine oil drain hose to hose cap assembly. insure adequate lubrication to the engine
9. Clean inside of the filter housing. components before engine starts.
10. Apply clean oil to O-ring on the new oil filter and install 13. After start-up, check low oil pressure indicator light
on the filter housing. and check filter for possible leaks.
11. Tighten filter by hand until seal contacts housing, then 14. Stop engine and check oil level after 10 min. Oil level
tighten 1/4—1/2 turn more. reading must be within crosshatch or at the upper
mark of the dipstick.
NOTE: Crankcase oil capacity varies slightly.
ALWAYS fill the crankcase to the full mark or
AS09261,0000166 -19-21NOV16-2/2
125-2 PN=249
041717
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
CQ298927 —UN—24MAR15
1. Set park brake, shut OFF engine and remove key so
dirt cannot be pulled into engine.
2. Inspect and clean filter housing before removing filters.
3. Open the snap latches (A) and remove dust cover (B).
4. Carefully remove the primary filter (C), by slightly
moving it from side to side while pulling outward.
5. Completely clean the inside of the housing using a
damp cloth.
IMPORTANT:
CQ298928 —UN—24MAR15
• Do not remove the safety filter (D).
• Only remove the safety filter to change it, i.e.
not remove and reinstall the same filter without.
• The safety filter admits no cleaning.
• Always change the safety filter:
- Every 1500 hours.
- If the filter is dirty.
- Every three primary filter changes.
A—Snap Latches (6 used) C—Primary Filter
6. Clean gasket sealing surface on new filter before B—Dust Cover D—Safety Filter
installation. Filters must be fully seated to avoid
contamination of the intake system.
NOTE: Use only John Deere recommended 8. Install previously removed dust cover and snap latches.
engine air filters.
125-3 041717
PN=250
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
T8130000318 —UN—30JAN13
T8T187 —UN—17APR14
CAUTION: Avoid possible serious injury from
spinning fan blades. Shut OFF engine and
wait for fan to stop completely. Remove
key and turn OFF battery disconnect switch
before inspecting isolators.
T8T190 —UN—21APR14
Inspect engine vibration isolators (A—C). If cracked,
damaged, or missing; contact your authorized John Deere
dealer.
WM05597,00011E2 -19-06FEB15-1/1
CQ298951 —UN—15APR15
key and turn OFF battery disconnect switch
before inspecting dampener.
A—Engine Crankshaft
Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III
Dampener
WM05597,00013B5 -19-10SEP15-1/1
125-4 041717
PN=251
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
T8T305 —UN—28APR14
T8T306 —UN—28APR14
Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III
T8T2447 —UN—07MAY15
T8T1911 —UN—27JAN15
125-5 041717
PN=252
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
CQ298931 —UN—25MAR15
CQ298932 —UN—25MAR15
Front Chopper Vibration Isolators Rear Chopper Vibration Isolators
RG17151 —UN—26MAY09
• Coolant leakage indicates a damaged front seal.
2. Replace complete coolant pump assembly if leakage
is detected: individual repair parts are not available.
A—Weep Hole
WM05597,0000E9D -19-06FEB15-1/1
125-6 041717
PN=253
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
T8T1228 —UN—22SEP14
T8T1229 —UN—22SEP14
New Wear Strip And Socket Head Cap Screw
Elevator chain can wear a groove in the wear strips (A)
and socket head cap screws (B).
Replace elevator wear strips when the groove wears
through half the width of the wear strip. See your
authorized John Deere dealer.
T8T1230 —UN—22SEP14
A—Wear Strip (22 used) B—Socket Head Cap Screw
WM05597,00011BA -19-06FEB15-1/1
125-7 041717
PN=254
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
T8140000288 —UN—28FEB14
3. Shut off engine and remove key.
4. Clean elevator thoroughly.
NOTE: Replace or reposition only one slat at a time
to maintain correct slat spacing.
5. Remove cap screws (C) and lock nuts from each end
of slat (A). Remove slat from chain.
6. Install slat in reverse order of removal using the
following special instructions:
IMPORTANT: Apply Thread Lock and Sealer (High
Strength) to threads of slat cap screws.
T8120002411 —UN—03DEC12
• Tighten slat cap screws to specification.
Specification
Elevator Slat Cap
Screws—Torque............................................................................49 N·m
(36 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000F68 -19-06FEB15-1/1
125-8 041717
PN=255
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
T8120002635 —UN—07JAN13
arm cover.
3. Remove valve from crankcase vent hose and clean
hose. Verify that hose is not plugged.
4. Shake crankcase valve. If free movement of valve is
heard while shaking, valve can be reused. Replace
valve if rattle is not heard.
5. Install the valve and vent hose. Attach valve to
bracket with two screws provided. Tighten hose clamp A—Vent Hose
securely.
WM05597,0000E99 -19-06FEB15-1/1
125-9 041717
PN=256
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Change Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
T8T3539 —UN—15JAN16
T8T402 —UN—24APR15
Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
T8T5022 —UN—16NOV16
3. Remove drain hose (F) from the hose cap assembly
(G).
NOTE: Machine has extra hose length to drain oil into
an approved container. Verify hose routing when
draining oil so that all oil is removed from the oil
pan. Care must be taken when replacing excess
hose back into engine compartment. Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
T8T5045 —UN—18NOV16
7. Replace fill the plug.
AS09261,0000163 -19-21NOV16-1/1
130-1 041717
PN=257
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
T8T2443 —UN—06MAY15
2. Run engine, with chopper engaged, approximately 5
min to warm gear case oil.
3. Set park brake, shut OFF engine, and remove key.
Wait for harvesting functions to stop.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to damage or lose Chopper Gear Case (Style A)
O-ring when removing drain plug.
T8T4955 —UN—10NOV16
IMPORTANT: Verify that O-ring stays seated
when installing drain plug.
Specification 10. Start engine, engage chopper, and allow to run for
Chopper Gear Case several minutes.
(Style A)—Capacity.......................................................................... 6.6 L
11. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait 10 min and
(1.75 gal)
check oil level at sight gauge. Add oil as necessary.
Chopper Gear Case
(Style B)—Capacity........................................................................... 13 L
(3.4 gal)
130-2 041717
PN=258
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
NW271330 —UN—15MAY06
2. Run engine, with the base cutter engaged,
approximately 5 minutes to warm gear case oil.
3. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait for harvesting
functions to stop completely.
4. Remove cap screws (A) and rubber side shield (B).
5. Remove gear case drain plug (C) and leg drain plugs
(D). Allow oil to drain completely.
NOTE: Dispose of waste oil according to all employer
and government environmental guidelines.
T8130000130 —UN—17JAN13
A—Cap Screws (3 used per C—Gear Case Drain Plug
side) D—Leg Drain Plugs
B—Rubber Shield
AS09261,00001DB -19-22MAR17-1/2
7. Remove the fill plug (A) from the top of gear case.
8. Fill gear case with 85W140 oil. Allow time for oil to
settle.
9. Check oil level at sight gauge. Level must be 3/4 of
T8130000196 —UN—18JAN13
sight gauge.
Specification
CH570 Base Cutter
Gear Case (Style
A)—Capacity.................................................................................... 9.5 L
(2.5 gal)
Specification
CH670 Base Cutter
Gear Case (Style
A—Fill Plug
A)—Capacity.................................................................................. 13.5 L
(3.5 gal)
Specification
11. Start engine, engage base cutter, and allow to run for
Base Cutter Gear Case
several minutes.
(Style B)—Capacity............................................................................. 7 L
(1.87 gal) 12. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait 10 minutes and
check oil level at sight gauge. Add oil as necessary.
10. Reinstall fill plug, rubber shield, and cap screws.
AS09261,00001DB -19-22MAR17-2/2
130-3 041717
PN=259
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
T8T656 —UN—29SEP14
T8T657 —UN—25JUN14
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death. Set
park brake, shut OFF engine, remove key,
and wait for all harvesting functions to stop
completely before servicing machine.
T8130003051 —UN—13DEC13
1. Park machine on a flat, level surface.
2. Fully extend upper knockdown roller forward toward
topper.
NOTE: If the knockdown roller is manually adjusted,
then move roller after removing key.
3. Raise topper boom, engage boom cylinder safety Viewed From Below Flywheel Housing
stop, and lower boom onto stop.
4. Raise base cutter, engage base cutter safety stops, A—Self-Locking Screws, 5/16 x C—Inspection Plate
and lower base cutter onto stops. 1 in. (8 used) D—Cap Screws (2 used)
B—Access Panel
5. Set park brake, shut OFF engine, and remove key.
6. Remove and retain self-locking screws (A) and access and must be replaced. See your authorized John
panel (B), to gain access to engine compartment. Deere dealer.
7. Locate inspection plate (C) under flywheel housing. 10. Install previously removed inspection plate and cap
screws.
IMPORTANT: When removing inspection plate,
be sure to hold plate level not to lose IMPORTANT: Replace self-locking screws as needed.
possible rubber samples.
11. Install previously removed access cover and
8. Remove and retain inspection plate and cap screws self-locking screws.
(D).
9. If significant rubber pieces are present, this indicates
that torsional dampener rubber blocks are damaged
WM05597,00011E8 -19-06FEB15-1/1
130-4 041717
PN=260
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
CQ298933 —UN—25MAR15
sign of damage such as cuts, fraying, extreme
or unusual wear, discoloration or abrasion,
the entire seat belt system should be replaced
immediately. For your safety, replace the belt
system only with replacement parts approved for
your machine, see your John Deere dealer.
TS1343 —UN—18MAR92
should perform repairs. Before disconnecting
fuel lines, sensors, or any other components
between the high-pressure fuel pump and
nozzles on engines with High-Pressure Common
Rail (HPCR) fuel system, wait a minimum of
15 min. after engine is stopped.
Due to High-Pressure Common Rail system
design, fuel in filter is likely to be under high
a diagnostic trouble code appears. Reset
pressure. To avoid possible personal harm, open
code after replacing filters.
valves (B) and (J) on bottom of filters to relieve
pressure before removing each filter.
130-5 041717
PN=261
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
T8T2427 —UN—04MAY15
• Do NOT pre-fill filter with fuel. This may
introduce debris into the fuel system. D
• Change primary and secondary fuel filters
F
if performance decline is noticed or a
diagnostic trouble code appears. Reset E
code after replacing filters.
CQ298940 —UN—08APR15
3. Connect a fuel drain hose on the drain plug (F) at the
bottom of the primary filter, then fully drain the fuel in
a suitable container.
NOTE: Use a suitable container to collect the
drained fuel and other sediments during
removal of the primary filter.
9. Install the new filter element (C) in the housing (D) NOTE: Be sure to replace secondary fuel filter also and
with the tabs on the bottom towards the housing. then prime system (see following).
130-6 041717
PN=262
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
T8T2426 —UN—04MAY15
• Do NOT pre-fill filter with fuel. This may
C
introduce debris into the fuel system.
• Change primary and secondary fuel filters
if performance decline is noticed or a
diagnostic trouble code appears. Reset D
code after replacing filters.
CQ298942 —UN—08APR15
3. Connect a fuel drain hose on the drain plug (D) at
the bottom of the final filter, then fully drain the fuel in
a suitable container.
NOTE: Use a suitable container to collect the drained fuel
and other sediments during removal of the final filter.
130-7 041717
PN=263
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
CQ298943 —UN—08APR15
NOTE: Catch fluids with an approved container
and dispose of according to employer and
government guidelines.
130-8 041717
PN=264
Maintenance—Every 1500 Hours
Replace Engine Safety Filter
1. Set park brake, shut OFF engine and remove key so
dirt cannot be pulled into engine.
2. Inspect and clean filter housing before removing filters.
CQ298927 —UN—24MAR15
3. Open the snap latches (A) and remove dust cover (B).
4. Carefully remove the primary filter (C), by slightly
moving it from side to side while pulling outward.
5. Completely clean the inside of the housing using
a damp cloth. Do not remove safety filter (D) until
housing is clean.
IMPORTANT:
• Only remove the safety filter to change it, i.e.
not remove and reinstall the same filter without.
• The safety filter admits no cleaning.
CQ298928 —UN—24MAR15
6. Unscrew safety filter (D) in a counterclockwise
direction to remove.
7. Clean gasket sealing surface on new filter before
installation. Filters must be fully seated to avoid
contamination of the intake system.
NOTE: Use only John Deere recommended
engine air filters.
A—Snap Latches (6 used) C—Primary Filter
8. Install a new safety filter and primary filter. B—Dust Cover D—Safety Filter
135-1 041717
PN=265
Maintenance—Every 1500 Hours
T8T317 —UN—01MAY14
O-ring when removing filter cover.
3. Remove and retain cap screws (C) and slowly lift filter
cover. Make sure no trash blows into tank while cover
is removed.
4. Remove filter assemblies.
5. Replace cover on tank to keep out trash.
6. Remove and retain nut, retainer, and spring (D) on
lower end of insert assembly. Slide filter (E) from rod
assembly (F).
T8130003034 —UN—02DEC13
7. Clean magnet (G) and inspect filter seals.
IMPORTANT: If hydraulic filters that do not meet
factory specifications are used, the warranty
of hydraulic components will be voided.
T8130003035 —UN—02DEC13
reservoir and tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Filter Cover Cap
Screws—Torque............................................................................49 N·m
(36 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000F6A -19-05FEB15-1/1
135-2 041717
PN=266
Maintenance—Every 1500 Hours
T8T1741 —UN—03DEC14
Check cap screws (A) on right-hand side of chopper
drums for rounded edges. To access all cap screws,
rotate chopper flywheel.
NOTE: Replace cap screws before edges are too
rounded to be removed.
135-3 PN=267
041717
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours
Check Engine Intake and Exhaust Valves
Clearance
Have engine intake and exhaust valve clearance checked
and adjusted if necessary, by your authorized John Deere
dealer.
WM05597,00011EC -19-06FEB15-1/1
140-1 041717
PN=268
Maintenance—Every 3000 Hours
Flush Coolant System (Tier 2/Stage II and
Tier 3/Stage III)
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Shut OFF engine and remove key. Only remove
filler cap when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop to relieve
pressure before removing completely.
145-1 041717
PN=269
Maintenance—Every 3000 Hours
CQ280164 —UN—13FEB08
coolant from engine block.
IMPORTANT: Thermostats must be removed to allow
entire cooling system to be flushed.
NW271170 —UN—15MAY06
6. After draining water, close drain valves and fill the
cooling system with clean water and Heavy Duty
Cooling System Cleaner, such as Fleetguard®
Restore® and Restore PLUS™. Comply with the
manufacturer's instructions.
7. After cleaning the cooling system, drain cleaner and fill
with water to flush the system. Run the engine about Water Pump Drain Valve
ten minutes, then drain out flushing water.
8. Close drain valves on engine block and water pump.
Install thermostats using a new gasket.
IMPORTANT: Air must be expelled from cooling
system when system is refilled. Loosen
NW271180 —UN—23MAY06
temperature sending unit fitting in cylinder head
or plug in thermostat housing to allow air to
escape when filling system. Retighten fitting or
plug when all the air has been expelled.
145-2 041717
PN=270
Maintenance—Every 3000 Hours
145-3 041717
PN=271
Maintenance—Every 4500 Hours
Grease Front Wheel Hub Bearings
1. Carefully pry hub cap (A) off the front wheel hub
assembly.
2. Inspect the bearing inside hub for adequate grease. If
T8130000204 —UN—21JAN13
the grease has hardened or is extremely dirty, remove
it from the hub.
3. To add grease to the front hub assembly:
a. Elevate the front wheel off the ground (see Jack
Locations section).
b. Apply three pumps of grease into the grease fitting
(B), and disconnect the grease gun.
c. Rotate the wheel assembly for three turns. A—Hub Cap B—Grease Fitting
Reconnect the grease gun and repeat this
procedure until fresh grease discharges from all
locations on the bearing.
d. Pack the hub cap (A) with fresh grease and reinstall
it on the hub assembly.
KR43067,0000CD9 -19-01MAR13-1/1
150-1 041717
PN=272
Maintenance—As Required
Cab Tilt Procedure
Raising the cab
T8T1659 —UN—26NOV14
T8T1656 —UN—14APR15
1. Park machine on level surface.
2. Completely lower base cutter.
NOTE: If base cutter must be in raised position,
safety stops MUST be engaged.
T8130000394 —UN—30JAN13
3. Completely lower crop dividers and topper.
4. Engage topper boom safety stop and lower boom onto
stop.
5. Shut OFF engine, remove key, and install lockout tag.
IMPORTANT: Avoid damaging windows and
doors on cab.
• Verify that ALL loose objects are removed A—Pump Handle C—Cab Tilt Lever
from cab before tilting. B—Cab Pump D—Raised Position
• Remove all objects from refrigerator
(if equipped).
• Verify that windows and doors are tightly 7. Turn cab tilt lever (C) to raise position (D).
closed and latched.
CAUTION: Do not leave the cab partially tilted.
6. Open left-hand engine compartment door. Locate and
remove pump handle (A) from inside left-hand door.
Insert pump handle into cab pump (B).
IMPORTANT: Cab tilt lever must be in lower
position whenever not in use.
Continued on next page WM05597,0001146 -19-18MAY15-1/4
155-1 041717
PN=273
Maintenance—As Required
T8T1661 —UN—26NOV14
T8T1780 —UN—13JAN15
A—Cab Safety Stop
T8T1878 —UN—13JAN15
A—Cab Tilt Lever B—Lower Position C—Pump
1. Verify that area beneath cab is clear of personnel and 2. Turn cab tilt lever (A) to lower position (B).
equipment.
3. Insert pump handle into pump (C).
IMPORTANT: Cab tilt lever must be in lower
position whenever not in use.
Continued on next page WM05597,0001146 -19-18MAY15-3/4
155-2 041717
PN=274
Maintenance—As Required
4. Pull cab tilt lock release cord (A) and operate pump
until cab is completely seated.
A—Release Cord
T8130000399 —UN—30JAN13
WM05597,0001146 -19-18MAY15-4/4
Wash Machine
IMPORTANT: USING HIGH-PRESSURE WASHERS:
Direct pressurized water at electronic/electrical
components or connectors, bearing seals,
hydraulic seals, fuel injection pumps, or
T6642EJ —UN—18OCT88
other sensitive devices may cause product
malfunctions. Reduce pressure and spray
at a 45—90° angle.
155-3 041717
PN=275
Maintenance—As Required
T8120002519 —UN—18DEC12
As necessary, check and refill reservoir (A) with clean
water or automobile windshield washer solution.
KR43067,0000C9F -19-25JAN13-1/1
RG13868 —UN—07FEB05
Do not attempt to service fuel pump, fuel rail,
or fuel injectors yourself. Special training and
special tools are required. (See your authorized
servicing dealer or engine distributor.)
Avoid seizure of internal precision parts in
high-pressure fuel pump or fuel injection rail.
Never steam clean or pour cold water on pump Fuel System
or rail while these components are still warm.
WM05597,0000873 -19-01MAR13-1/1
155-4 041717
PN=276
Maintenance—As Required
T8T1777 —UN—07JAN15
Do not overfill fuel tank. Bodily injury can
result from fuel splash back. Leakage can
result from expansion of fuel.
CQ298952 —UN—15APR15
engine compartment.
OU90500,00003ED -19-15APR15-1/1
155-5 041717
PN=277
Maintenance—As Required
T8T1226 —UN—12NOV14
T8T1227 —UN—18SEP14
Some Parts Removed For Clarity Some Parts Removed For Clarity
CAUTION: Set park brake, shut OFF engine, and IMPORTANT: Be careful not to lose O-ring
remove key before performing maintenance work. on drain plug.
1. Close fuel shutoff valve. See Fuel Shutoff Valve in 4. Remove and retain drain plug (C).
this section.
IMPORTANT: Apply High Temperature Form-In-Place
2. Remove and retain flange head cap screws (A) and Gasket to threads of drain plug before installing.
shield (B).
5. Install previously removed drain plug.
IMPORTANT: Capture and dispose of flammable
materials in accordance with local laws 6. Install previously removed shield and flange head cap
and regulations. screws.
155-6 041717
PN=278
Maintenance—As Required
T8T1232 —UN—22SEP14
3. Remove fill strainer (E).
4. Clean the inside of the fuel tank by rinsing with clean
diesel fuel.
5. Dispose of waste according to employer and
government guidelines.
Some Parts Removed For Clarity
6. When tank is empty, remove the fuel line shutoff valve
and the suction strainer (F).
7. Clean suction and fill strainers with solvent.
IMPORTANT: Apply High Temperature Form-In-Gasket
to threads of drain plug and suction
T8T1233 —UN—22SEP14
strainer before installing.
T8T1234 —UN—22SEP14
A—Fuel Shutoff Valve D—Drain Plug
B—Cap Lock E—Fill Strainer
C—Cap F— Suction Strainer
WM05597,00010DA -19-06FEB15-1/1
Bleed Fuel System If engine will not start after filter changes, turn ignition key
NOTE: Normally the fuel system is self-priming and ON for 60 seconds to prime the fuel system. It may be
self-bleeding, and does not require a bleeding necessary to turn the key off and on again to reprime the
procedure by the opeartor. system before starting.
JR07957,00002E8 -19-26FEB13-1/1
155-7 041717
PN=279
Maintenance—As Required
CQ298927 —UN—24MAR15
1. Set park brake, shut OFF engine and remove key so
dirt cannot be pulled into engine.
2. Inspect and clean filter housing before removing filters.
3. Open the snap latches (A) and remove dust cover (B).
4. Carefully remove the primary filter (C), by slightly
moving it from side to side while pulling outward.
IMPORTANT: Replace the primary filter when
occurs the first event below:
• If damages are found at the inspections.
• After every three cleanings1.
CQ298928 —UN—24MAR15
• Every 500 hours.
5. Completely clean the inside of the housing using
a damp cloth. Do not remove safety filter (D) until
housing is clean.
IMPORTANT:
• Only remove the safety filter to change it, i.e.
not remove and reinstall the same filter without. A—Snap Latches (6 used) C—Primary Filter
• The safety filter admits no cleaning. B—Dust Cover D—Safety Filter
• Always change the safety filter:
- Every 1500 hours.
- If the filter is dirty. 6. Unscrew safety filter (D) in a counterclockwise
- Every three primary filter changes. direction to remove. Safety filter stops dirt that would
pass through damaged primary filter.
1
After each cleaning and inspection, make a mark with pen on the
filter element to control the amount of cleanings.
Continued on next page OU90500,00003C1 -19-08APR15-1/4
155-8 041717
PN=280
Maintenance—As Required
CQ294576 —UN—07MAY13
that there is no damage in the filter. If there is any sign
of damage in the filter, discard the filter.
IMPORTANT:
• Never wash, brush or knock elements.
• If using compressed air, the air must be
directed from the inside (clean side) of the
filter. The air must be dry and the maximum
pressure allowed is 5 bar (72.5 psi), the nozzle
should be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. and held no closer
than 50 mm (2 in.) from the filter media. CAUTION: Never clean the safety filter.
• Ensure that contaminant does not enter or Replace if dirty.
come in contact with the clean side of the filter.
IMPORTANT: Never run engine without both
2. After the cleaning process is complete, inspect the filters in place.
filter again to ensure that no damage occurred during
cleaning. If there is any sign of damage to the filter,
discard the filter.
OU90500,00003C1 -19-08APR15-2/4
CQ294575 —UN—07MAY13
1. Hold a bright light (A) inside filter and check carefully
for holes. Discard any filter that has even the slightest
hole.
2. Be sure outer screen (B) is not dented. Vibration
would quickly wear a hole in filter.
3. Be sure filter gasket (C) is in good condition. Press the
gasket on the new filter to see if it springs back. Make
sure that the new filter has a highly compressible released. If gasket is damaged or missing, replace
gasket that springs back when finger pressure is filter.
Continued on next page OU90500,00003C1 -19-08APR15-3/4
155-9 041717
PN=281
Maintenance—As Required
CQ298928 —UN—24MAR15
engine air filters.
2. Install a new safety filter (D) and new primary filter (C)
or reinstall primary filter (C) after cleaning.
3. Install dust cover (B) and snap latches (A).
CQ298927 —UN—24MAR15
OU90500,00003C1 -19-08APR15-4/4
CQ298929 —UN—24MAR15
A—Knob C—Fresh Air Filter
B—Dust Cover
OU90500,00003C6 -19-24MAR15-1/1
155-10 041717
PN=282
Maintenance—As Required
CQ298930 —UN—24MAR15
5. Reinstall the components in the reverse order.
OU90500,00003C7 -19-24MAR15-1/1
Clean Radiators
CAUTION: Cooling radiators may be HOT.
Allow engine to cool before touching surfaces
or using water for cleaning.
T8T565 —UN—13JUN14
before servicing cooling radiators.
155-11 041717
PN=283
Maintenance—As Required
T8140000088 —UN—03MAR14
T8140000089 —UN—03MAR14
2. Pull pin (A) up and swing radiator assembly (B)
outward.
3. Remove and retain cap screws (C) and access panels
(D).
IMPORTANT: When using high-pressure air or
water, be careful of fin damage to coolers.
Straighten bent fins. Bent fins decrease
cooler performance.
T8T668 —UN—27JUN14
5. On front side of cooling tower, remove cap screws (C)
and access panel (D).
6. Clean large radiators using compressed air or water
sprayed from inside the cooling tower outwards.
7. Install previously removed access panels and cap Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III
screws.
8. Place radiator assembly back in tower and close A—Pin C—Cap Screws (24 used)
radiator door. Engage latches. B—Radiator Assembly D—Access Panels (2 used)
WM05597,00013BB -19-11SEP15-2/2
155-12 041717
PN=284
Maintenance—As Required
TS281 —UN—15APR13
cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly
loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
3. The factory recommended antifreeze is JD Cool Gard 6. Stop the engine and install radiator cap (A).
pre-diluted antifreeze. JD antifreeze/coolant can 7. Every 25 hours reverse blow or wash the radiator to
also be used in either a pre-diluted mixture or as a remove accumulated dirt and trash.
concentrate mixed with 40 to 60 percent of quality
distilled water. Specification
Cooling System—Capac-
4. Add coolant to expansion tank as needed. ity.................................................................................................... 69,6 L
NOTE: Air will bleed through the surge tank when (18.4 U.S. gal)
cap is removed.
GB52027,000054A -19-22MAY09-1/1
155-13 PN=285
041717
Maintenance—As Required
TS281 —UN—15APR13
enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly
loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
JG50163,000028D -19-25JAN13-1/2
RG14831 —UN—05APR06
3. Fill high pressure coolant circuit at top tank.
4. Begin filling coolant recovery tank (if equipped).
5. When air is purged and coolant is visible coming out of
vent hole on EGR cooler (if equipped), reinstall EGR
cooler vent plug and tighten to specification.
EGR CoolerVent Plug
Specification
EGR Cooler (if
A—Plug to Bleed Air from EGR
equipped) Vent Plug to
Cooler (if equipped)
Cooler—Torque.............................................................. 20 N•m (15 lb-ft)
155-14 041717
PN=286
Maintenance—As Required
TS281 —UN—15APR13
filler cap when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop to relieve
pressure before removing completely.
155-15 041717
PN=287
Maintenance—As Required
CQ280164 —UN—13FEB08
coolant from engine block.
IMPORTANT: Thermostats must be removed to allow
entire cooling system to be flushed.
NW271170 —UN—15MAY06
6. After draining water, close drain valves and fill the
cooling system with clean water and Heavy Duty
Cooling System Cleaner, such as Fleetguard®
Restore® and Restore PLUS™. Comply with the
manufacturer's instructions.
7. After cleaning the cooling system, drain cleaner and fill
with water to flush the system. Run the engine about Water Pump Drain Valve
ten minutes, then drain out flushing water.
8. Close drain valves on engine block and water pump.
Install thermostats using a new gasket.
IMPORTANT: Air must be expelled from cooling
system when system is refilled. Loosen
NW271180 —UN—23MAY06
temperature sending unit fitting in cylinder head
or plug in thermostat housing to allow air to
escape when filling system. Retighten fitting or
plug when all the air has been expelled.
155-16 041717
PN=288
Maintenance—As Required
T8T316 —UN—01MAY14
2. When oil is cold, oil level must be at the center of the
sight gauge (A). Add oil when oil level is below that
position.
3. Remove protective cover and clean quick-disconnect
fitting (B) on rear of tank. Clean the fitting (C) on the
pump hose and attach it to quick-disconnect fitting on
the tank.
4. Remove and retain vent cap (D) on the side of
hydraulic reservoir.
T8130003032 —UN—02DEC13
5. Pump oil into hydraulic reservoir until it reaches the
center of the sight gauge.
6. Install previously removed vent cap.
7. Remove pump hose and replace protective cover.
AS09261,00001E0 -19-22MAR17-1/1
155-17 041717
PN=289
Maintenance—As Required
T8T2329 —UN—13APR15
3. Drain oil into an approved container.
NOTE: Dispose of oil according to employer and
government guidelines.
T8130002468 —UN—04OCT13
before replacing blades.
Avoid serious injury from sharp edges. Wear
gloves when handling blades.
WM05597,0000E58 -19-10DEC14-1/1
155-18 PN=290
041717
Maintenance—As Required
T8T1231 —UN—22SEP14
Some blades may be reused by cutting approximately
76 mm (3 in.) (B) off the worn end of the blade. This will
give you a straight-sided blade with a new cutting edge.
Mount blades back onto disks using different mounting
holes, and rotate when necessary.
B
A—Base Cutter Blade B—Measurement
WM05597,00010DB -19-22SEP14-1/1
T8T642 —UN—16SEP14
Avoid serious injury from sharp edges. Wear
gloves when handling blades.
WM05597,000138F -19-13AUG15-2/2
155-19 041717
PN=291
Maintenance—As Required
T8T666 —UN—27JUN14
1. Remove and retain hardware (B).
2. Adjust the deflector shield based on type of cane
being harvested.
• THICK BARREL CANE: When cutting thick barrel
cane, adjust deflector shield to the highest position.
This position deflects billets to a height closest to
the primary extractor fan.
• MEDIUM BARREL CANE: When cutting medium A—Billet Deflector Shield B—Hardware (2 used)
barrel cane, adjust deflector shield to the medium
position. This position aids in the cleaning process
and prevents billets from being discharged through prevents light billets from being discharged through
primary extractor blades. primary extractor blades.
• THIN BARREL CANE: When cutting thin barrel 3. Install previously removed hardware.
cane, adjust deflector shield to the lowest position.
This position aids in the cleaning process and
WM05597,0000FCC -19-09FEB15-1/1
T8T4849 —UN—20SEP16
3. Tighten nuts.
AS09261,00000FA -19-12OCT16-1/1
155-20 PN=292
041717
Maintenance—As Required
T8T1663 —UN—26NOV14
Avoid possible serious injury from sharp edges.
Wear gloves when handling blades.
T8130000510 —UN—27FEB13
Shredder topper uses 38 blades.
Shredder Topper
WM05597,0000E55 -19-23JAN15-1/1
155-21 041717
PN=293
Maintenance—As Required
T8140000091 —UN—03MAR14
shut OFF engine, remove key and wait for
all harvesting functions to stop completely
before servicing machine.
5. Remove and retain hardware (A) and knife holder (B). 8. Verify crop divider scrolls DO NOT contact knives.
Remove and discard vine cutter knife (C) from crop Adjust as necessary.
divider. 9. Tighten hardware to specification.
CAUTION: Vine cutter knives are shipped Specification
with guards (D). Do not remove guards until Hardware—Torque......................................................................140 N·m
installation is complete. (105 lb.-ft.)
T8140000092 —UN—03MAR14
park brake, shut OFF engine, remove key,
and wait for side knives to stop rotating
before replacing blades.
Avoid possible serious injury from sharp edges.
Wear gloves when handling blades.
1. Remove and retain cap screws and lock nuts (A) and
discard blades (B).
Some Parts Removed For Clarity
2. Install new blade with serrated edge facing away from
side knife plate. Tighten to specification.
A—Cap Screw and Lock Nut (2 B—Blade (3 used per side)
Specification used per blade)
Triangle Style Side
Knife Blade Cap
Screws—Torque............................................................................34 N·m
3. Repeat for remaining blades.
(25 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000E56 -19-23JAN15-1/1
155-22 PN=294
041717
Maintenance—As Required
T8130000509 —UN—27FEB13
topper to completely stop rotating before
adjusting shear plates.
Avoid serious injury from sharp edges. Wear
gloves when handling blades.
155-23 041717
PN=295
Maintenance—As Required
T8T2929 —UN—12AUG15
IMPORTANT: When replacing extractor blades,
always use John Deere blades.
Always replace blades as a complete set. Do
not install new blades with used blades.
T8T2898 —UN—22JUL15
2. Place opening (B) of supplied gauge (C) over blade at
location (A) on all four blades.
3. Blade life is determined by how far gauge goes over
blade.
Green Area (D) Blades are in good condition. No
replacement needed.
Yellow Area (E) Blades are in acceptable condition.
Replacement needed soon. A—Location D—Green Area
Red Area (F) Blades are fully worn. Replace B—Opening E—Yellow Area
blades now. C—Gauge F— Red Area
155-24 041717
PN=296
Maintenance—As Required
T8T2930 —UN—13AUG15
2. Clean primary extractor fan and surrounding area.
3. Remove and retain cap screws (B) and fan blades (A).
IMPORTANT: Apply Thread Lock and Sealer
(High Strength) to threads of cap screws
before installing.
4. Install new fan blades and retain with previously A—Fan Blade (4 used) B—Hardware (16 used)
removed cap screws.
5. Verify that fan blades do not contact extractor housing
when rotated by hand.
6. Check fan operation. See Start Up Procedure After
Extractor Blade Replacement in this section.
WM05597,0001384 -19-13AUG15-2/2
TS677 —UN—21SEP89
safety equipment. Verify that all personnel
have evacuated extractor operating area
before start-up.
155-25 041717
PN=297
Maintenance—As Required
T8120002636 —UN—07JAN13
before servicing extractor.
T8130002948 —UN—18NOV13
T8130000218 —UN—21JAN13
Inspect for loose cap screws (A) using this procedure: the torque-turn method. If the torque is higher, it is
acceptable.
1. Mark bolt head and the adjacent surface of the track
shoe. Specification
Cap Screws—Torque..................................................................407 N·m
2. Loosen bolt approximately 1/8 of a turn (45°). (300 lb.-ft.)
3. Tighten bolt until the two marks align.
4. Read the torque at this point. If the torque is below
specification, loosen all four bolts and retighten by
OU90500,00003D9 -19-02APR15-1/1
155-26 PN=298
041717
Service—Electrical System
Welding Near Electronic Control Units
IMPORTANT: Do not jump-start engines with arc
welding equipment. Currents and voltages are
too high and may cause permanent damage.
TS953 —UN—15MAY90
2. Disconnect the positive (+) battery cable(s).
3. Connect the positive and negative cables together. Do
not attach to vehicle frame.
4. Clear or move any wiring harness sections away from
welding area.
5. Connect welder ground close to welding point and
away from control units. 6. After welding, reverse Steps 1—5.
DX,WW,ECU02 -19-14AUG09-1/1
T8T1990 —UN—03FEB15
is stored longer than 25 days. If storage period
is longer than 90 days, remove negative lead to
batteries to minimize load to batteries.
WM05597,00013AF -19-10SEP15-1/1
160-1 041717
PN=299
Service—Electrical System
Fuse Center
NOTE: Fuse center is on front, left-hand side of harvester.
T8T2017 —UN—24FEB15
Continued on next page AS09261,00001E1 -19-05APR17-1/2
160-2 041717
PN=300
Service—Electrical System
T8T648 —UN—25JUN14
F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28
AS09261,00001E1 -19-05APR17-2/2
160-3 041717
PN=301
Service—Electrical System
T8130000224 —UN—23JAN13
T8T2954 —UN—03SEP15
Viewed With Cab Tilted
Check engine ground strap (A) and cab ground strap (B) NOTE: Cab must be tilted to access cab ground strap.
for fraying or damage. Verify that connection points are
clean and tight.
WM05597,00013A8 -19-03SEP15-1/1
160-4 041717
PN=302
Service—Electrical System
TS203 —UN—23AUG88
• Wear protective equipment when
handling batteries.
• Avoid spills and drips.
• Use proper jump start procedures.
Skin contact with acid:
1. Flush area with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help Swallowed acid:
neutralize acid.
3. Seek medical attention. 1. Drink large amount of water or milk.
2. Drink antacid product, beaten eggs,
Eye contact with acid: or vegetable oil.
1. Flush eyes with clean water for 10-15 minutes. 3. Get medical attention immediately.
2. Get medical attention immediately.
KR43067,0000CA3 -19-25JAN13-1/1
160-5 041717
PN=303
Service—Electrical System
Service Batteries
Battery Access
TS204 —UN—15APR13
of California to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. ALWAYS wash hands after handling.
T8T2018 —UN—24FEB15
Continued on next page WM05597,0000E9F -19-21APR15-1/3
160-6 041717
PN=304
Service—Electrical System
Battery Care
T8T2019 —UN—24FEB15
NEVER check battery charge by placing a
metal object across terminals. Use a voltmeter,
hydrometer, or battery tester.
ALWAYS remove NEGATIVE (-) battery connection
first, and reconnect it last.
T8120002575 —UN—04JAN13
i. Apply thin coating of petroleum jelly and baking
soda mixture on posts and terminals.
j. Install battery compartment cover and cap screws.
2. Keep batteries fully charged, especially during
cold-weather operation (see Use a Booster
Battery/Battery Charger in Operating the Engine
section for proper procedures).
A—Negative (-) Terminals (2 C—Battery Posts (4 total)
used) D—Battery Terminals (4 total)
B—Positive (+) Terminals (2
used)
160-7 041717
PN=305
Service—Electrical System
Battery Replacement
1. Turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position.
2. Remove cap screws and battery compartment cover.
3. Disconnect negative terminals (A) on both batteries.
T8T2020 —UN—24FEB15
4. Disconnect positive terminals (B) on both batteries.
5. Remove and retain hardware (C) and strap (D).
6. Install new batteries in reverse order of removal
procedure.
WM05597,0000E9F -19-21APR15-3/3
TS266 —UN—23AUG88
• Turn light switch OFF and allow bulb to cool
before changing bulbs. Leave switch OFF
until bulb change is complete.
• Wear eye protection when changing bulb.
• Handle bulb by its base. Wear protective gloves
or avoid touching light bulb surface.
• Use a clean cloth and alcohol to remove
any fingerprints from glass bulb before
installing. Skin oil deposited on bulb will cause
overheating and premature failure.
• Do not drop or scratch bulb.
• Keep moisture away from bulb.
• Do not operate bulb outside of its enclosure.
H59774 —UN—30AUG99
A—Halogen Bulb
WM05597,0000E1D -19-10FEB14-1/1
160-8 041717
PN=306
Service—Electrical System
H96621 —UN—25MAY10
NOTE: Replacement light bulbs are sensitive to
skin contact. Wear protective gloves or avoid
touching light bulb surface.
4. Replace bulb.
5. Push in bulb assembly and turn clockwise to install
into housing.
6. Rotate light housing to previous operating position and
connect wiring harness.
7. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
H96622 —UN—25MAY10
A—Connector C—Bulb Assembly
B—Headlight Assembly
WM05597,0000EDC -19-09DEC14-1/1
H96624 —UN—25MAY10
screw. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
Horizontal Adjustment: Rotate light assembly left or right
to desired position. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
A—Cap Screw
WM05597,0000EDD -19-09DEC14-1/1
160-9 041717
PN=307
Service—Electrical System
H96625 —UN—25MAY10
skin contact. Wear protective gloves or avoid
touching light bulb surface.
A—Screws C—Clip
B—Face Plate Lens D—Bulb Assembly
H96626 —UN—25MAY10
WM05597,0000EDE -19-09DEC14-1/1
H96628 —UN—25MAY10
remaining lights as needed.
A—Cap Screw
WM05597,0000EDF -19-09DEC14-1/1
A—Nut C—Bracket
B—Cap Screws D—Light Assembly
160-10 041717
PN=308
Service—Electrical System
T8T4680 —UN—23AUG16
AS09261,00000BA -19-06SEP16-2/2
T8T4702 —UN—24AUG16
AS09261,00000BB -19-02SEP16-1/1
Safety Rules When Replacing High Intensity Discharge (HID) Xenon Lights
TS266 —UN—23AUG88
• High voltage is conducted by electrical
connection between lights and ballast unit;
this connection must never be disconnected
without first disconnecting vehicle wiring
harness to ballast.
• Wear eye protection when changing bulb.
• Handle bulb by its base. Wear protective gloves
or avoid touching light bulb surface.
• Use a clean cloth and alcohol to remove
• Do not operate bulb outside of its enclosure.
Bulb has a high internal pressure and if cracked
any fingerprints from glass bulb before or broken it could explode and cause injury.
installing. Skin oil deposited on bulb will cause
overheating and premature failure.
• Place used bulb in new bulb carton and dispose
of properly. Keep out of reach of children.
• Do not drop or scratch bulb.
• Keep moisture away from bulb.
WM05597,0000E22 -19-10FEB14-1/1
160-11 041717
PN=309
Service—Electrical System
H96644 —UN—27MAY10
eye protection is worn.
If lights were previously operated, wait a minimum
of five minutes before servicing bulb.
A—HID-Xenon Lights
WM05597,0000EE0 -19-09DEC14-1/2
H96646 —UN—27MAY10
H96634 —UN—26MAY10
1. Rotate light housing (A) toward outside of cab.
2. Disconnect wiring harness connector (B) from light
assembly.
3. Remove socket head cap screws (C) and remove rear
housing (D).
H96635 —UN—26OCT10
4. Pry locking tab (E) and remove HID-Xenon bulb (F).
IMPORTANT: Handle bulb by the base and
avoid touching glass.
160-12 041717
PN=310
Service—Electrical System
H96647 —UN—27MAY10
assembly up or down to desired position and tighten cap
screw. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
Horizontal Adjustment: Rotate light assembly left or right
to desired position. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
A—Cap Screw
WM05597,0000EE1 -19-09DEC14-1/1
H96613 —UN—25MAY10
H96614 —UN—25MAY10
1. Push down on lens (A) and turn counterclockwise to
remove.
2. Pry clip (B) from locking tab (C).
3. Remove bulb assembly (D) from connector (E).
NOTE: Replacement light bulbs are sensitive to
H96615 —UN—25MAY10
skin contact. Wear protective gloves or avoid
touching light bulb surface.
WM05597,0000EE2 -19-09DEC14-1/1
160-13 041717
PN=311
Service—Electrical System
CQ298953 —UN—15APR15
T8T772 —UN—09JUL14
A—Cap Screws (4 used) B—Light Cover D—Lens
C—Screws (3 used) E—Bulb
1. Remove and retain cap screws (A) and light cover (B). 5. Push and turn clockwise bulb (E) to install into front
2. Remove and retain screws (C) and lens (D). turn signal assembly.
3. Push and turn bulb (E) counterclockwise and remove. 6. Install previously removed lens (D), screws (C), light
cover (B), and cap screws (A).
4. Replace bulb.
WM05597,00012CE -19-21APR15-1/1
T8140000082 —UN—27FEB14
harness connector (D).
3. Remove and retain lock nuts and washers (E).
CQ298793 —UN—21NOV14
160-14 041717
PN=312
Service—Electrical System
CQ298794 —UN—19SEP14
8. Install in reverse order.
9. Repeat on remaining tail light.
OU90500,00003EF -19-15APR15-2/2
T8140000069 —UN—11FEB14
Left-Hand Side Of Elevator Shown Left-Hand Side Of Cooling Tower Shown
NOTE: Field lights are on both sides of elevator 2. Remove and retain hardware (C).
and cooling tower.
3. Replace bulb assembly and retain with previously
1. Disconnect wiring harness connector (A) from bulb removed hardware and connect wiring harness
assembly (B). connector.
WM05597,0000EE5 -19-09DEC14-1/1
160-15 041717
PN=313
Service—Electrical System
H96618 —UN—02JUN10
2. Install bulb and lens cover in reverse order.
WM05597,0000EE6 -19-25MAR14-1/1
H97965 —UN—13SEP10
as shown.
WM05597,0000EE7 -19-25MAR14-1/1
160-16 041717
PN=314
Wheels and Tires
Service Tires Safely
TS211 —UN—15APR13
DX,RIM1 -19-27OCT08-1/1
Tire Information
IMPORTANT: If installing a tire with a different
brand than what is listed, consult maximum
pressure rating on tire.
Tire Sizes and Pressures
Tire Size kPa bar psi
14 x 17.5 (10PR) 415 4.1 60
Front
14 x 17.5 (14PR) 550 5.5 80
23.5 x 25 (20PR) 370 3.7 54
Rear
23.5 R25 (28PR) 345 3.4 50
WM05597,0001162 -19-12NOV14-1/1
165-1 041717
PN=315
Wheels and Tires
T8130000204 —UN—21JAN13
the grease has hardened or is extremely dirty, remove
it from the hub.
3. To add grease to the front hub assembly:
a. Elevate the front wheel off the ground (see Jack
Locations section).
b. Apply three pumps of grease into the grease fitting
(B), and disconnect the grease gun.
c. Rotate the wheel assembly for three turns. A—Hub Cap B—Grease Fitting
Reconnect the grease gun and repeat this
procedure until fresh grease discharges from all
locations on the bearing.
d. Pack the hub cap (A) with fresh grease and reinstall
it on the hub assembly.
KR43067,0000CD9 -19-01MAR13-1/1
Recommended Tools:
KR43067,0000C88 -19-25JAN13-1/1
165-2 041717
PN=316
Wheels and Tires
Change a Tire
Removing Wheel
T8T585 —UN—10JUN14
A—Guard Rails C—Wheel Assemblies
B—Wheel Cap Screws (8 used on
front, 16 used on rear)
CAUTION: Avoid injury or death. Chock all NOTE: See Jack Locations section for proper
wheels before servicing tires. jack placement.
1. Park machine on a firm and level surface. 7. Support machine with floor stand or blocks.
2. Shut OFF engine, set park brake, and remove key. 8. Position wheel lift under the wheel. Fasten a safety
chain around upper portion of the tire.
3. Chock all wheels.
9. Remove wheel bolts and pull the wheel assembly (C)
4. Remove guard rails (A) as necessary to access wheels. away from machine.
5. Loosen wheel cap screws (B) before lifting harvester
off the ground. CAUTION: Use proper tire handling equipment
to pull wheel from machine.
6. Using 20 ton floor jack at proper jack point, slowly
raise wheel off the ground.
Continued on next page WM05597,0000FA5 -19-09FEB15-1/2
165-3 041717
PN=317
Wheels and Tires
Installing Wheel
T8T550 —UN—11JUN14
A—Wheel C—Guard Rails
B—Wheel Cap Screws (8 used on
front, 16 used on rear)
IMPORTANT: Apply anti-seize to threads of wheel 3. Remove floor stand and lower machine to the ground.
bolts before installing. 4. Check wheel cap screw torques again.
2. Position wheel (A) using a wheel lift. Guide the wheel 5. Check tire air pressure.
onto hub and install wheel cap screws (B). Tighten
to specification. 6. Install all previously removed guard rails (C).
WM05597,0000FA5 -19-09FEB15-2/2
Tire Performance of the tire carcass is in the optimum range and maximum
tire performance can be expected. If this combination of
Tires are designed to carry a specified load at a specified design factors is altered for any reason, tire performance
inflation pressure when mounted on a recommended will be reduced.
width rim. When these conditions are met, the deflection
JR07957,00002E7 -19-21FEB13-1/1
Checking Tire Pressure the pressure rises somewhat as the air or fluid becomes
warm. A tire that has sufficient pressure when it is hot
Tires filled with air or fluid should be tested when the tires may be under-inflated when it cools down.
are cold and before the vehicle is put into operation since
AG,T803584,174 -19-07JUN00-1/1
165-4 PN=318
041717
Wheels and Tires
CM982500026 —UN—04JAN00
AG,T803584,176 -19-07JUN00-1/1
Tire Over-Inflation
Over-inflation results in tire carcass deformations. The
tread is more rounded which concentrates treadwear at
the centerline area. Traction is reduced in high torque
service because ground contact of the tread shoulder
area is reduced and the harder carcass with reduced
flexing characteristics does not work as efficiently. The
tightly stretched over-inflated carcass is more subject to
weather checking and impact break damage.
Over-inflation, shown here, is less common except
where weights or attachments are removed from the
unit without deflating the tires.
CM982500027 —UN—04JAN00
AG,T803584,178 -19-07JUN00-1/1
165-5 041717
PN=319
Wheels and Tires
Under-Inflation
Tire overload or under-inflation has the same effect of
deforming the tire. Under such conditions the tread on
the tire will wear rapidly and unevenly, particularly in the
shoulder area. Radial cracking in the upper sidewall area
will be a problem. With under-inflated drive tires in high
torque applications, sidewall buckles will develop leading
to carcass breaks in the sidewall. Rim slip can also be a
problem with under-inflation. While an under-inflated drive
tire may pull better in some soil conditions, this is not
generally true and not worth the high risk of tire damage
that such an operation invites.
Under-inflation, shown here, causes bulk. This is a
CM982500028 —UN—04JAN00
common condition with agricultural tires.
AG,T803584,179 -19-07JUN00-1/1
Sidehill Harvesting both rear tires by 0.3 bar (4 PSI) over the recommended
field service inflation. When only one tire is in the down
When harvesting back and forth on the side of a hill, the position, it is only necessary to increase the pressure in
rear tires on each side of a unit will alternately be on the that tire.
down side. It is then necessary to increase pressure of
AG,T803584,181 -19-07JUN00-1/1
165-6 041717
PN=320
Tracks
Track Components
T8T1099 —UN—02SEP14
A—Idler Wheel C—Carrier Roller E—Drive Sprocket G—Track Shoe
B—Track Tension Adjuster Fitting D—Rear Axle Cover F— Track Roller (8 per track)
WM05597,00010AC -19-02SEP14-1/1
T8130000222 —UN—22JAN13
3. Attach lubrication gun nozzle and pump oil in until
it comes out from around the fitting. This indicates
correct level.
NOTE: If escaping oil from around the fitting is
dirty or mixed with water, keep pumping until
escaping oil is completely clean.
170-1 041717
PN=321
Tracks
T8130002948 —UN—18NOV13
T8130000218 —UN—21JAN13
A—Cap Screws (4 used)
Track Alignment
One of the most important factors to check to ensure a A simple field test to check the load distribution is to drive
good service life is correct track alignment. All the rollers the machine on a hard surface for about 1 km (5/8 mile).
should be central to a line from the sprocket tooth center Check the rollers for correct oil level prior to this test. Feel
to the front idler center. each roller with your hand and note the temperature of
Another vital check is that all bottom track rollers are each one, any rollers that feel hotter than the others would
level. Misalignment from wear, bearing failure, or a indicate that they are carrying more than their share of
distortion in track frame causes uneven distribution of the the load.
weight among the rollers. Rapid failure will occur with
uncorrected uneven load distribution. A new bottom roller
should never be used along with worn ones.
OU64006,0000194 -19-19MAY06-1/1
170-2 PN=322
041717
Tracks
T8130000219 —UN—21JAN13
A—Chain Pin C—Distance E—Fitting
B—Carrier Roller D—Fitting Base
170-3 PN=323
041717
Jack Locations
Jack Locations
T8130000220 —UN—21JAN13
TS229 —UN—23AUG88
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death. Do
NOT support machine weight with lifting
device. Position blocks or stands under
machine after lifting.
Consider height of machine when lifted to
avoid overhead obstructions.
T8T426 —UN—16MAY14
IMPORTANT: Using jack locations other than two front
and two rear shown can cause machine damage.
175-1 041717
PN=324
Fire Prevention
Recommended Fire Prevention inspection or cleaning, always set park brake, shut OFF
engine, and remove key.
The machine must be inspected periodically throughout
the harvest day. Buildup of crop material and other debris Your machine is equipped with a general-purpose fire
must be removed to ensure proper machine function and extinguisher and a pressurized water fire extinguisher.
to reduce the risk of fire. The extinguisher must be checked daily when entering
or exiting the cab and when working around machine to
Regular and thorough cleaning of machine combined ensure that it is in working condition. Fire extinguishers
with other routine maintenance procedures listed in the must be replaced or professionally serviced after any
Operators Manual greatly reduces the risk of fire, chance usage.
of costly downtime, and improves machine performance.
For further information, see Machine Cleanout section.
Always follow all safety procedures posted on the machine
and in the Operator’s Manual. Before carrying out any
WM05597,0000F13 -19-09FEB15-1/1
Fire Prevention
1. Machines should be cleaned of debris at least daily,
particularly around engine, exhaust, and steering
components. The buildup of crop debris in the engine
compartment, on the engine, and near any moving
parts is a fire hazard.
2. Before tilting cab, remove debris from platform area
around sides and at back of cab.
3. Machines should be inspected at least daily for
potential fire hazards in electrical, exhaust, steering,
fuel, hydraulic, and brake systems. Repairs should be
made immediately.
4. Service personnel should be instructed on what to do
CM989999028 —UN—10NOV00
when a fire starts, how to use the fire extinguisher,
and must follow such instructions. Operators should
be required to demonstrate an ability to use fire
suppression equipment.
5. Hydraulic leaks and accumulation of grease, fuel,
and oil (including spillage) should be eliminated
immediately.
6. The radiator and the engine cooling system should
be cleaned and serviced daily to maintain moderate
engine temperatures.
7. Any portable extinguisher or fire suppression system operations and/or when the fuel system is open to the
carried on the machine that has been previously atmosphere.
used should be recharged or replaced before the 10. Do not weld where hydraulic hoses or electrical wiring
machine resumes operation. A partially discharged can be damaged. Depressurize hydraulic hoses
extinguisher has reduced capability and may not work and move or protect. Move or protect electrical
a second time. wiring/harnesses.
8. Before welding or brazing on any part of machine, the 11. Rotate the billet deflector down and remove any trash
part and surrounding area should be cleaned and a and/or debris daily. Return billet deflector to its normal
fire extinguisher should be made readily available. operating position.
9. Smoking, naked flames, and so forth, should not
be permitted around any machine during fueling
AS09261,00000A1 -19-12OCT16-1/1
180-1 041717
PN=325
Fire Prevention
H90363 —UN—05DEC07
3-6 M
Your machine is equipped with a general-purpose fire 3. Pull safety pin from top of extinguisher.
extinguisher and a pressurized water fire extinguisher. 4. Hold extinguisher upright by handles and aim hose at
Extinguishers must be checked daily when entering or base of flames.
exiting the cab and when working around machine to 5. Squeeze handles to discharge fire extinguisher.
ensure that it is in working condition. Fire extinguishers 6. Move nozzle back and forth, covering flames with a
must be replaced or professionally serviced after any cloud of powder.
usage.
Inspection Checklist:
Fire Extinguisher Recommendations:
At least once per month, inspect fire extinguisher and
General-Purpose Fire Extinguisher: ensure the following:
• Use extinguisher for grease, oil, electrical, and chemical 1. Is fire extinguisher positioned in designated location
fires.
on landing?
Pressurized Water Fire Extinguisher: 2. Are there any obstructions to proper access or
visibility?
• Use extinguisher for crop material buildup or crop 3. Are operating instructions on nameplate legible and
debris fires. facing outward?
Use of Fire Extinguisher: 4. Are safety seals broken or missing?
5. Is extinguisher full (checking by gauge and by lifting
The diagram shows the recommended method to extinguisher)?
extinguish a fire. Always aim towards base of fire. 6. Is there any physical damage, corrosion, leakage, or a
clogged nozzle?
The following are basic steps for the use of a fire
extinguisher: IMPORTANT: When inspection of fire extinguisher
reveals a deficiency, extinguisher must
1. Remove fire extinguisher from bracket and carry to be serviced or replaced.
area of fire.
2. Approach area of fire with wind to your back.
WM05597,0000EDB -19-08APR14-1/1
180-2 041717
PN=326
Fire Prevention
H92727 —UN—10SEP08
CAUTION: Before attempting to recharge ensure
that extinguisher is completely depressurized.
H92728 —UN—08SEP08
Nut—Torque.....................................................................11.3—11.9 N·m
(100—105 lb-in)
180-3 041717
PN=327
Fire Prevention
H92729 —UN—08SEP08
A—Pin C—Holder
B—Hose and Nozzle Assembly
WM05597,0000EDA -19-25MAR14-3/3
TS202 —UN—23AUG88
tank outdoors.
Prevent fires by keeping machine clean of accumulated
trash, grease, and debris. Always clean up spilled fuel.
Use only an approved fuel container for transporting
flammable liquids.
Never fill fuel container in pickup truck with plastic bed
liner. Always place fuel container on ground before
refueling. Touch fuel container with fuel dispenser nozzle Do not store fuel container where there is an open flame,
before removing can lid. Keep fuel dispenser nozzle in spark, or pilot light such as within a water heater or other
contact with fuel container inlet when filling. appliance.
DX,FIRE1 -19-12OCT11-1/1
DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1
180-4 041717
PN=328
Fire Prevention
TS227 —UN—15APR13
battery disconnect switch.
AS09261,00000AC -19-11AUG16-1/1
Fire Extinguishers
A general-purpose fire extinguisher and a pressurized
water fire extinguisher with mounting brackets are
installed on your machine.
Read label on extinguishers and become familiar with
instructions on how to use and maintain them. Once
extinguisher is discharged, no matter for how long, it must
be recharged.
IMPORTANT: Pressurized water fire extinguisher must
not be exposed to freezing temperatures unless
protected with antifreeze. See instructions decal
on extinguisher for further information.
H92841 —UN—16SEP08
General-Purpose And Water Fire Extinguisher
WM05597,0000DDF -19-07APR14-1/1
180-5 041717
PN=329
Fire Prevention
In Case of Fire
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury.
TS227 —UN—15APR13
machine immediately and move safely away from the fire.
Do not return to the machine! The number one priority
is safety.
Call the fire department. A portable fire extinguisher can
put out a small fire or contain it until the fire department
arrives; but portable extinguishers have limitations.
Always put the safety of the operator and bystanders first.
If attempting to extinguish a fire, keep your back to the 1. Pull the pin. Hold the extinguisher with the nozzle
wind with an unobstructed escape path so you can move pointing away from you, and release the locking
away quickly if the fire cannot be extinguished. mechanism.
Read the fire extinguisher instructions and become familiar 2. Aim low. Point the extinguisher at the base of the fire.
with their location, parts, and operation before a fire starts.
Local fire departments or fire equipment distributors may 3. Squeeze the lever slowly and evenly.
offer fire extinguisher training and recommendations.
4. Sweep the nozzle from side-to-side.
If your extinguisher does not have instructions, follow
these general guidelines:
DX,FIRE4 -19-22AUG13-1/1
CQ298955 —UN—15APR15
to large battery cables and high temperature areas of
engine system including: manifold, turbocharger, air
preheat ducts, exhaust ducts, muffler and other exhaust
items. Check and repair any insulation wraps to eliminate
openings that collect debris.
180-6 041717
PN=330
Machine Cleanout
Clean Out Machine (Periodic)
Cleaning Information
TS206 —UN—15APR13
IMPORTANT: Crop material and other debris can
accumulate in various areas, causing a fire
hazard. Direction of wind, type of crop, and
crop moisture content can all effect where
and how much crop material and debris can
accumulate. Inspect and clean these areas
throughout the harvest day.
185-1 041717
PN=331
Machine Cleanout
Engine Compartment
T8130000238 —UN—23JAN13
CQ298956 —UN—15APR15
Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III
Inspect and clean areas around the engine. Primary areas
that must be cleaned are:
1. Turbocharger
2. Underneath Engine
3. Exhaust Manifold
T8130000324 —UN—23JAN13
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-2/14
T8T2429 —UN—24APR15
185-2 041717
PN=332
Machine Cleanout
T8T414 —UN—15MAY14
T8T415 —UN—15MAY14
T8T416 —UN—15MAY14
T8T417 —UN—15MAY14
Shield Removed For Clarity
T8130000323 —UN—23JAN13
185-3 041717
PN=333
Machine Cleanout
Exhaust
Inspect and clean areas around exhaust.
T8T5251 —UN—05APR17
Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-5/14
Cooling Package
Inspect and clean areas around the cooling package.
Primary areas that must be cleaned are:
1. Fan (Motor, Blades, Grill)
2. Radiators and Intake Screen
T8T419 —UN—15MAY14
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-6/14
Fuel Tank
Inspect and clean areas around the fuel tank (Shutoff
valve, vent, filler cap, and filters).
T8T422 —UN—15MAY14
185-4 041717
PN=334
Machine Cleanout
Crop Dividers
Inspect and clean areas around the crop dividers. Primary
areas that must be cleaned are:
1. Top and Bottom of Scroll
2. Motor and Hoses
3. Lift Arms and Cylinder
T8T566 —UN—13JUN14
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-8/14
T8T427 —UN—16MAY14
T8130000328 —UN—23JAN13
185-5 041717
PN=335
Machine Cleanout
T8T2921 —UN—10AUG15
T8T176 —UN—11APR14
Inspect and clean areas around the extractor. Primary 2. Chain
areas that must be cleaned are: 3. Rotation Ring
4. Fan Assembly and Ring
1. Rotation Motor
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-10/14
T8T5041 —UN—18NOV16
T8T2450 —UN—07MAY15
185-6 041717
PN=336
Machine Cleanout
Elevator
T8130000354 —UN—24JAN13
T8130000355 —UN—24JAN13
T8T161 —UN—22SEP14
4. Elevator Chain Guides, Wear Strips, Frame, and Cart
Guard
T8T1779 —UN—13JAN15
185-7 041717
PN=337
Machine Cleanout
Drive Components
T8T423 —UN—15MAY14
T8T568 —UN—13JUN14
Inspect and clean areas around the drive components. 2. Tracks, Drive Sprocket, Idlers, Rollers, Axles, and
Primary areas that must be cleaned are: Suspension Components.
1. Wheels, Final Drives, Axles, Suspension Components,
and Steering Linkage.
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-13/14
Feed Rollers
Clean feed rollers of excess mud and leaf trash.
T8T567 —UN—13JUN14
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-14/14
185-8 041717
PN=338
Machine Cleanout
H39607 —UN—11OCT88
3. Lower topper boom and crop dividers.
4. Raise base cutter and engage base cutter safety stops.
5. Shut OFF engine, set parking brake, remove key, and
block wheels.
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-2/9
T8130000225 —UN—23JAN13
A—Base Cutter Shield
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-3/9
T8T2428 —UN—24APR15
Continued on next page WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-4/9
185-9 041717
PN=339
Machine Cleanout
A—Shield Latch
T8T2455 —UN—08MAY15
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-5/9
T8T551 —UN—12JUN14
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-6/9
e. Tilt cab forward and engage safety stop (see Cab Tilt
Procedure in Maintenance—As Required section).
T8T552 —UN—12JUN14
185-10 041717
PN=340
Machine Cleanout
T8T553 —UN—12JUN14
Continued on next page WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-8/9
185-11 041717
PN=341
Machine Cleanout
T8T1982 —UN—07MAY15
7. Starting at the top of machine and working downward, 13. Fuel Tank (fill cap, vent, shutoff, and drain valves)
clean the following areas of the machine: 14. Engine Compartment (sides and below engine,
hoses, mounts, pump drive gear case, pumps,
1. Cab (outside and underneath) valves)
2. Cooling Tower (fan, motor, radiators, hoses, 15. Topper and Boom (pivots, hinge points, hoses,
screens, door) motors, gathering and severing disks)
3. Exhaust 16. Knockdown Roller (motors, rollers, cylinders,
4. Top of Engine (turbocharger, hoses, manifolds) hoses)
5. Platform, Ladders, and Brush Rails 17. Crop Dividers (scrolls, side knives, motors, hoses,
6. Primary Extractor—Exterior (hood, hoses, chain, lift cylinders, and arms)
motor, ring) 18. Base Cutter (blades, legs, motors, around gear
7. Primary Extractor—Interior (fan blades, inner ring, case, hoses)
hood) 19. Drive Components (tracks or wheels, motors,
8. Elevator (elevator discharge flap, hoses, chain, and hoses, final drives, suspension)
slats, wear strips, screens, basket, swing table) 20. Glass, Lights, Reflectors, and Reflective Tape
9. Secondary Extractor (hood, hoses, chain, motor,
ring, fan blades) 8. Inspect entire machine for missing hardware,
10. Chopper (motors, gear case, flywheel, hoses, damaged parts, or leaks. Repair as necessary.
blades)
11. Feed Rollers (rollers, mat, floating arms, motors) 9. Install all previously removed panels, shields, and
12. Hydraulic Reservoir (fill coupler, vent, fittings) guards. Close and latch all doors and covers.
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-9/9
185-12 041717
PN=342
Storage
Prepare Machine for Storage
1. Slide open cooling tower screen and clean the
following with air, water, or a vacuum: IMPORTANT: Do not use high-pressure washer spray
directly on bearings. High-pressure water can
• Screen get past most seals and cause damage. Dry
• Radiator these areas, then lube and run machine.
• Hydraulic oil cooler
• Engine oil cooler 9. Repaint areas where needed.
2. Clean air pre-cleaner. 10. Lubricate entire machine and grease threads on
adjusting bolts.
3. Clean outside of engine with a safe solvent.
11. Check all fasteners for proper torque.
CAUTION: Do not use gasoline to clean engine. 12. Fill fuel tank to prevent condensation.
4. After warming up and shutting off engine, drain oil. IMPORTANT: When fuel is stored in the machines
Replace oil filter and fill with correct oil. Add 0.66 L fuel tank or farms storage tank for extended
(22 oz.) of corrosion inhibitor to fresh oil. Run engine periods, or if there is a slow turn over of fuel,
to circulate. add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the fuel and
prevent water condensation. Contact your John
5. Drain, flush, and refill cooling system with 50/50 Deere dealer for recommendations.
mixture of antifreeze and water.
For prolonged machine storage, the best
6. Charge batteries completely. Specific gravity should practice is to drain BioDiesel and fill machine
equal 1.260. with regular petroleum diesel fuel. Otherwise use
• Up to 25 days of storage—Turn battery disconnect BioDiesel stabilizer (anti-oxidant) additives or
switch to OFF position. fully formulated BioDiesel conditioners. Contact
• Up to 90 days of storage—Disconnect negative (-) your John Deere dealer for recommendations.
lead to batteries.
• More than 90 days of storage—Remove and clean 13. Every 60—90 days start engine and turn air
batteries. Store them in a cool dry place and keep conditioning ON. Run engine at slow idle for several
them charged. minutes for compressor seal lubrication. Outside
temperature should be above 5°C (40°F) for proper
7. Drain water separator bowls. air conditioning operation.
8. Clean machine inside and out.
WM05597,0000F6E -19-09DEC14-1/1
190-1 041717
PN=343
Troubleshooting
Engine your John Deere dealer. If any problems remain, use
the following information to solve engine problems.
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the engine, first retrieve all
fault codes on the armrest display and relay them to
Symptom Problem Solution
Hard to Start or Will Not Start Poor fuel quality. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
of the proper grade.
Too high viscosity crankcase oil. Drain crankcase oil and replace with
correct viscosity oil.
Engine Misfiring or Runs Irregularly Electronic Control Unit problem or See your John Deere dealer.
basic engine problem.
Lack of Engine Power Poor fuel quality. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
of the proper grade.
High pressure fuel pump out of time. See your John Deere dealer.
195-1 041717
PN=344
Troubleshooting
High pressure fuel pump out of time. See your John Deere dealer.
Air leak on suction side of air intake Check hose and pipe connections for
system. tightness; repair as required.
Improper type or poor quality of fuel. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
of the proper grade.
195-2 041717
PN=345
Troubleshooting
High pressure fuel pump out of time. See your John Deere dealer.
Fuel in Oil Cracked cylinder head. See your John Deere dealer.
Abnormal Engine Noise Worn main or connecting rod bearings. See your John Deere dealer.
NOTE: Variable geometry
turbocharger recycles after
starting engine, causing a
momentary revving sound in the
engine. This is normal.
Do not confuse the whine heard
during turbocharger run down
with noise which indicates a
bearing failure. The whine
heard during turbocharger run
down is normal.
Excessive crankshaft end play. See your John Deere dealer.
Worn connecting rod bushings and See your John Deere dealer.
piston pins.
Scored pistons. See your John Deere dealer.
Worn timing gears or excess backlash. See your John Deere dealer.
195-3 041717
PN=346
Troubleshooting
Low engine oil level. Check oil level. Add oil as required.
Improper type or poor quality of fuel. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
of the proper grade.
KR43067,0000C66 -19-25JAN13-4/4
195-4 041717
PN=347
Troubleshooting
Electrical System
Symptom Problem Solution
Undercharged System Excessive electrical load from added Remove accessories or install higher
accessories. output alternator.
Battery Uses Too Much Water Cracked battery case. Check for moisture and replace as
necessary.
Batteries Will Not Charge Loose or corroded connections. Clean and tighten connections.
Starter and Hour Meter function; Blown fuse on magnetic switch. Replace fuse.
Rest of Electrical System Does Not
Function
Entire Electrical System Does Not Faulty battery connection. Clean and tighten connections.
Function
195-5 041717
PN=348
Troubleshooting
KR43067,0000C67 -19-06DEC12-2/2
195-6 041717
PN=349
Troubleshooting
Lubrication System
Symptom Problem Solution
Low Oil Pressure Low crankcase oil level. Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Clogged oil cooler or filter. Replace filter or see your John Deere
dealer.
Excessive oil temperature. Inspect and clean oil cooler. See your
John Deere dealer.
Oil pressure regulating valve failure. See your John Deere dealer.
Clogged oil pump screen or cracked See your John Deere dealer.
pick-up tube.
Excessive main or connecting rod See your John Deere dealer.
bearing clearance.
High Oil Pressure Incorrect oil. Drain crankcase and refill with correct
oil.
Oil pressure regulating valve failure. See your John Deere dealer.
Stuck or damaged filter bypass valve. See your John Deere dealer.
Stuck or damaged oil cooler bypass See your John Deere dealer.
valve.
Excessive Oil Consumption Too low viscosity crankcase oil. Drain crankcase and refill with correct
viscosity oil.
Crankcase oil level too high. Drain oil until oil level is correct.
Oil control rings not seated. See your John Deere dealer.
Oil control rings worn or broken. See your John Deere dealer.
Piston ring grooves excessively worn. See your John Deere dealer.
195-7 041717
PN=350
Troubleshooting
Piston rings sticking in ring grooves. See your John Deere dealer.
Piston ring gaps not staggered. See your John Deere dealer.
Front and/or rear crankshaft oil seal See your John Deere dealer.
faulty.
KR43067,0000C68 -19-25JAN13-2/2
Cooling System
Symptom Problem Solution
Engine Overheats Lack of coolant in cooling system. Fill cooling system to proper level.
Too low crankcase oil level. Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Coolant in Crankcase Cylinder head gasket defective. See your John Deere dealer.
Faulty coolant pump seal; weep hole See your John Deere dealer.
plugged; coolant leaking through
bearing.
Coolant Temperature Below Normal Defective thermostat(s). See your John Deere dealer.
KR43067,0000C69 -19-06DEC12-1/1
195-8 041717
PN=351
Troubleshooting
Air Intake
Symptom Problem Solution
Turbocharger “Screams” Air leak in intake manifold. See your John Deere dealer.
Turbocharger Noise or Vibration Bearings not lubricated (insufficient oil Determine cause of lack of lubrication;
pressure). repair as required. See your John
NOTE: Variable geometry Deere dealer.
turbocharger recycles after
starting engine, causing a
momentary revving sound in the
engine. This is normal.
Do not confuse the whine heard
during run down with noise
which indicates a bearing failure.
Air leak in engine intake or exhaust See your John Deere dealer.
manifold.
Improper clearance between turbine See your John Deere dealer.
wheel and turbine housing.
Broken blades (or other wheel Inspect turbocharger. See your John
failures). Deere dealer.
KR43067,0000C6A -19-06DEC12-1/1
195-9 041717
PN=352
Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Accessing Diagnostic Trouble Code Menu
T8120001781 —UN—09OCT12 H95846 —UN—31MAR10
Message Center
Application Softkey
Main Menu Softkey (Display) / Main Menu Switch (Armrest)
Select main menu softkey. Select message center softkey.
WM05597,000113A -19-14NOV14-1/4
T8130001513 —UN—30APR13
WM05597,000113A -19-14NOV14-2/4
T8130001514 —UN—30APR13
with show all menu (D). Select show all menu. This
displays all trouble codes for all control units.
200-1 041717
PN=353
Diagnostic Trouble Codes
T8130001515 —UN—30APR13
• Trouble Code (B)
• Active (Yes or No) (C)
• Count (D)
Select desired code.
Code description (E) appears and gives more detail of
trouble code.
Select accept softkey (F) to return to previous screen.
Select return softkey (G) to return to previous screen or
until clear softkey (H) is displayed.
T8130001516 —UN—30APR13
A—Control Unit E—Code Description
B—Trouble Code F— Accept Softkey
C—Active (Yes or No) G—Return Softkey
D—Count H—Clear Softkey
WM05597,000113A -19-14NOV14-4/4
200-2 041717
PN=354
Calibration Procedures
Calibration Procedures
T8130002609 —UN—29OCT13
T8T641 —UN—19JUN14
Diagnostic Readings Page
1. Press diagnostic switch (A).
2. Select calibration softkey (B).
3. Select calibrations menu (C).
T8130002610 —UN—29OCT13
4. Select desired calibration.
5. Select accept softkey (D).
6. Follow instructions shown on display to calibrate.
7. Repeat as needed for other calibrations.
WM05597,0000FB4 -19-14NOV14-1/1
205-1 041717
PN=355
Calibration Procedures
205-2 041717
PN=356
Specifications
Fluid Capacities
IMPORTANT: See Fluids, Lubricants, and Coolant
section for recommended fluid types.
Capacity
Machine Component (Fluid) CH570 CH670
Engine Oil 33.3 L (8.8 gal) 33.3 L (8.8 gal)
Hydraulic Reservoir 405 L (107 gal) 405 L (107 gal)
Radiator (Coolant) 69.6 L (16.5 gal) 69.6 L (16.5 gal)
Fuel Tank (Diesel) 605 L (160 gal) 605 L (160 gal)
Final Drive 3.0 L (0.8 gal) 3.0 L (0.8 gal)
Chopper Gear Case (Style A) 6.6 L (1.75 gal) 6.6 L (1.75 gal)
Chopper Gear Case (Style B) 13 L (3.4 gal) 13 L (3.4 gal)
Base Cutter Gear Case (Style A) 9.5 L (2.5 gal) 13.5 L (3.5 gal)
Base Cutter Gear Case (Style B) 7 L (1.87 gal) Not equipped
Pump Drive Gear Case 7.1 L (1.87 gal) 7.1 L (1.87 gal)
Lubricated Joints (Grease) As necessary As necessary
Air Conditioning System 3.6 kg (8 lb) 3.6 kg (8 lb)
355 mL (12 oz) 355 mL (12 oz)
Cab Tilt Pump Reservoir 0.57 L (19 oz) 0.57 L (19 oz)
AS09261,00001E3 -19-22MAR17-1/1
210-1 041717
PN=357
Specifications
Component Specifications
Component Specifications
Drive Train
Transmission Double Variable Displacement Pumps:
AS09261,00000A9 -19-13SEP16-1/1
210-2 PN=358
041717
Specifications
Engine Specifications
Engine Specifications
Type John Deere 6090H, 9.0 L
Quantity of Cylinders 6
6090HT807 Non-EGR Tier 2/Stage II
Model
6090HT806 Tier 3/Stage III
CH570 CH570 and CH670
Standard Power High Power
(Tier 2/ Stage II and Tier 3/ Stage III) (Tier 2/ Stage II and Tier 3/ Stage III)
Peak Power 272 kW (365 hp) at 2000 rpm 298 kW (400 hp) at 2000 rpm
Rated Power 239 kW (321 hp) at 2200 rpm 261 kW (350 hp) at 2200 rpm
1299 N·m (958 lb·ft) at 2000 rpm 1421 N·m (1048 lb·ft) at 2000
Torque
1037 N·m (765 lb·ft) at 2200 rpm 1134 N·m (836 lb·ft) at 2200 rpm
Air Intake Turbocharger and air-to-air aftercooled
Oil Capacity Maximum Load 33.3 L (8.8 gal)
Coolant capacity 69.6 L (18.4 gal)
Bore 118.4 mm (4.66 in)
Stroke 136 mm (5.4 in)
Displacement 9.0 L (549 in3)
Compression Ratio 16.0:1
Engine Firing Order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Electrical System 12 V Maintenance-Free Battery (2 used)
Valves Per Cylinder 2 Intake
2 Exhaust
Battery (Group 31) 925 CCA
180 min
Thermostat Start To Open 82°C
Temperature (180°F)
Thermostat Fully Open 94°C
Temperature (202°F)
Recommended Radiator 100 kPa
Pressure Cap (1 bar)
(15 psi)
Oil Pressure At Rated Speed 290 kPa
With Oil Warmed to 105°C (2.9 bar)
(220°F) (42 psi)
Oil Pressure At Low Idle 138 kPa
(minimum) (1.4 bar)
(20 psi)
Length (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 1208 mm
3/Stage III) (47.6 in)
Width (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 630 mm
3/Stage III) (24.8 in)
Height (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 1113 mm
3/Stage III) (43.8 in)
Weight (dry) (Tier 2/Stage II 901 kg
and Tier 3/Stage III) (1986 lb)
AS09261,00000CB -19-13SEP16-1/1
210-3 041717
PN=359
Specifications
Dimensions
T8T1546 —UN—28JAN15
Track Machine Shown
WM05597,0000F45 -19-28JAN15-1/1
Weight
Approximate Machine Weight
Sugar Cane Harvester 21 440 kg (47 275 lb.)
WM05597,0001327 -19-15JUN15-1/1
210-4 041717
PN=360
Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
Hardware N·m lb.-ft.
Rear Wheel Bolts (if equipped)a 529 390
Front Wheel Bolts (if equipped)a 230 170
Track Drive Sprocket Bolts (if equipped)b 529 390
Track Shoe Hardware (if equipped)a 407 300
Track Roller Mounting Hardware (if equipped)b 475 350
Rear Axle Inner Nut (if equipped) 814 600
Rear Axle Outer Bolts (if equipped) 50 37
Base Cutter Gear Case Mounting Boltsb 427 315
Base Cutter Blade Mounting Hardware 110 80
Swing Table Upper Pin Nutb 407 300
Swing Table Lower Pin Nutb 407 300
Hydraulic Tank Coverc 49 36
Hydraulic Tank Access Coverc 49 36
a
Apply Anit-Seize to threads of hardware before installing.
b
Apply Thread Lock and Sealer (High Strength) to threads of hardware before installing.
c
Apply Thread Lock and Sealer (Medium Strength) to threads of hardware before installing.
AS09261,00000C9 -19-08SEP16-1/1
210-5 041717
PN=361
Specifications
Bolt or Screw SAE Grade 1 SAE Grade 2a SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2 SAE Grade 8 or 8.2
Size Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc
N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in.
1/4 3.7 33 4.7 42 6 53 7.5 66 9.5 84 12 106 13.5 120 17 150
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
5/16 7.7 68 9.8 86 12 106 15.5 137 19.5 172 25 221 28 20.5 35 26
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
3/8 13.5 120 17.5 155 22 194 27 240 35 26 44 32.5 49 36 63 46
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
7/16 22 194 28 20.5 35 26 44 32.5 56 41 70 52 80 59 100 74
N·m lb.-ft.
1/2 34 25 42 31 53 39 67 49 85 63 110 80 120 88 155 115
9/16 48 35.5 60 45 76 56 95 70 125 92 155 115 175 130 220 165
5/8 67 49 85 63 105 77 135 100 170 125 215 160 240 175 305 225
3/4 120 88 150 110 190 140 240 175 300 220 380 280 425 315 540 400
7/8 190 140 240 175 190 140 240 175 490 360 615 455 690 510 870 640
1 285 210 360 265 285 210 360 265 730 540 920 680 1030 760 1300 960
1-1/8 400 300 510 375 400 300 510 375 910 670 1150 850 1450 1075 1850 1350
1-1/4 570 420 725 535 570 420 725 535 1280 945 1630 1200 2050 1500 2600 1920
1-3/8 750 550 950 700 750 550 950 700 1700 1250 2140 1580 2700 2000 3400 2500
1-1/2 990 730 1250 930 990 730 1250 930 2250 1650 2850 2100 3600 2650 4550 3350
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt Replace fasteners with the same or higher grade. If higher
or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening grade fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the
procedure is given for a specific application. For plastic insert or crimped steel original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you
type lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate
tightening instructions for the specific application. Shear bolts are designed to fail plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts
under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade. or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in. (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6
in. (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.
b
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or 7/8 in.
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
c
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or 1/4 to 3/4 in. fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ1 -19-12JAN11-1/1
210-6 PN=362
041717
Specifications
Bolt or Screw Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9
Size Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb
N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in.
M6 4.7 42 6 53 8.9 79 11.3 100 13 115 16.5 146 15.5 137 19.5 172
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
M8 11.5 102 14.5 128 22 194 27.5 243 32 23.5 40 29.5 37 27.5 47 35
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
M10 23 204 29 21 43 32 55 40 63 46 80 59 75 55 95 70
N·m lb.-ft.
M12 40 29.5 50 37 75 55 95 70 110 80 140 105 130 95 165 120
M14 63 46 80 59 120 88 150 110 175 130 220 165 205 150 260 190
M16 100 74 125 92 190 140 240 175 275 200 350 255 320 235 400 300
M18 135 100 170 125 265 195 330 245 375 275 475 350 440 325 560 410
M20 190 140 245 180 375 275 475 350 530 390 675 500 625 460 790 580
M22 265 195 330 245 510 375 650 480 725 535 920 680 850 625 1080 800
M24 330 245 425 315 650 480 820 600 920 680 1150 850 1080 800 1350 1000
M27 490 360 625 460 950 700 1200 885 1350 1000 1700 1250 1580 1160 2000 1475
M30 660 490 850 625 1290 950 1630 1200 1850 1350 2300 1700 2140 1580 2700 2000
M33 900 665 1150 850 1750 1300 2200 1625 2500 1850 3150 2325 2900 2150 3700 2730
M36 1150 850 1450 1075 2250 1650 2850 2100 3200 2350 4050 3000 3750 2770 4750 3500
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always
the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or replace shear bolts with identical property class. Replace fasteners with
tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For stainless steel the same or higher property class. If higher property class fasteners are
fasteners or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener
specific application. Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When
by turning the nut to the dry torque shown in the chart, unless different possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts,
instructions are given for the specific application. wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or M20
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
b
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or M6 to M18 fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ2 -19-12JAN11-1/1
210-7 PN=363
041717
Machine Identification Numbers
Interpret Product Identification Number
H105725 —UN—22AUG12
215-1 041717
PN=364
Machine Identification Numbers
Identification Numbers component for any John Deere product support program.
Also, they are needed for law enforcement to trace your
Your machine has these various identification plates. The machine if it is ever stolen. ACCURATELY record these
letters and numbers stamped on these plates identify characters in the spaces provided in each of the following
a component or assembly. ALL of these characters are photographs.
needed when ordering parts or identifying a machine or
WM05597,0000BDE -19-06SEP13-1/1
T8130001160 —UN—15APR13
Sample Identification Plate
WM05597,0000BE0 -19-06SEP13-1/1
T8T688 —UN—25JUN14
215-2 041717
PN=365
Machine Identification Numbers
T8T2933 —UN—14AUG15
Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III
WM05597,00013BA -19-10SEP15-1/1
T8T407 —UN—08MAY14
WM05597,0000F83 -19-14JUL14-1/1
215-3 041717
PN=366
Machine Identification Numbers
T8T4758 —UN—07SEP16
AS09261,00001E4 -19-22MAR17-1/1
TS1680 —UN—09DEC03
3. Other steps you can take:
- Mark your machine with your own numbering system
- Take color photographs from several angles of each
machine
DX,SECURE1 -19-18NOV03-1/1
TS230 —UN—24MAY89
- Remove any keys and batteries
3. When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of
exits and lock your storage buildings.
4. When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and
fenced area.
5. Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts
immediately to law enforcement agencies.
6. Notify your John Deere dealer of any losses.
DX,SECURE2 -19-18NOV03-1/1
215-4 041717
PN=367
Machine Identification Numbers
215-5 041717
PN=368
Index
Page
Page
A
Rear plate on base cutter disks
Access manager application..................................... 45-34 Adjust ................................................................ 60-13
Access the engine compartment ................................ 50-1 Remove and install blades.................................. 155-18
Accumulators Target height ........................................................... 40-2
Check pre-charge pressure .................................. 130-5 Base cutter gear case oil
Adjust Change ...................................................... 100-8, 130-3
Armrest Check level ......................................................... 105-13
Control Console................................................... 20-9 Battery
Display................................................................. 20-9 Access .................................................................. 160-6
Billet deflector shield ........................................... 155-20 Care ...................................................................... 160-6
Elevator chain tension............................................110-7 Disconnect switch ........................................ 50-1, 160-1
Front plate on base cutter disks............................ 60-13 Handling safely ..................................................... 160-5
Primary extractor chain tension .......................... 155-26 Remove and install ............................................... 160-6
Rear plate on base cutter disks ............................ 60-13 Safety.................................................................... 160-6
Row Width............................................................. 45-22 Battery disconnect switch ................................ 50-1, 160-1
Air conditioning Battery Handling, Safety
Recirculation filter ................................................155-11 Safety, Battery Handling ....................................... 10-13
Specifications........................................................ 210-1 Beacon
Air intake................................................................... 195-9 Replace light bulb ............................................... 160-13
Alarm, backup............................................................. 55-3 Belt
Antenna ...................................................................... 25-2 Check wear ......................................................... 120-10
Armrest Belt tensioner
Adjusting Inspect ................................................................ 120-10
Control console ................................................... 20-9 BioDiesel fuel.............................................................. 85-5
Display................................................................. 20-9 Blades
Controls Remove and install base cutter blades ............... 155-18
ClimaTrak automatic temperature control ......... 30-13 Remove and install chopper blades.................... 155-19
Operator interface ............................................... 30-9 Remove and install primary extractor blades...... 155-24
Display Remove and install side knife blades.................. 155-22
Navigation ........................................................... 45-1 Remove and install topper blades....................... 155-21
Switches Remove and install vine cutter knives................. 155-22
Lights................................................................. 30-14 Bleeding air from coolant system ........................... 155-14
Radio functions (if equipped)............................. 30-14 Bolt and screw torque values
Auxiliary power outlet strip........................................ 20-10 Metric .................................................................... 210-7
Avoid static electricity risk when Unified inch ........................................................... 210-6
fueling ............................................................ 10-10, 85-2 Brakes
Releasing rear brakes............................................. 80-4
B Break-in engine oil
Non-Emissions certified and certified tier
Backup alarm.............................................................. 55-3 1, tier 2, tier 3, stage I, stage II, and stage III...... 85-12
Base cutter ............................................................... 60-10 Brightness level and boundary box color.................. 45-26
Actual height ........................................................... 40-2 Alarm volume setting ............................................ 45-26
Angle.......................................................... 60-11, 60-12 Boundary box color settings.................................. 45-26
Adjust ..................................................... 60-11, 60-12 Day/night settings ................................................. 45-26
Blade................................................................... 155-19 Dim mode.............................................................. 45-26
Contour base cutter height control system Sync with cab/standalone modes ......................... 45-26
Operate ............................................................. 65-10 Butt-lifter feed roller .................................................. 60-15
Cutting pressure...................................................... 40-2
Front plate on base cutter disks C
Adjust ................................................................ 60-13
Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3 Cab
Inspect hardware ...................................................115-2 After market radios.................................................. 25-1
Lubricate .................................................... 100-9, 120-5 ClimaTrak automatic temperature control ............. 30-13
Multi-function lever Controls
Controls ............................................................... 30-6 Operator interface ............................................... 30-9
Operate ................................................................. 60-14 Display
Navigation ........................................................... 45-1
Index-1 041717
PN=1
Index
Page Page
Index-2 041717
PN=2
Index
Page Page
Index-3 041717
PN=3
Index
Page Page
Index-4 041717
PN=4
Index
Page Page
Index-5 041717
PN=5
Index
Page Page
Index-6 041717
PN=6
Index
Page Page
Index-7 041717
PN=7
Index
Page Page
Auxiliary power outlet strip .................................... 20-10 Regional setting, languages, time/date
Emergency exit ....................................................... 20-2 settings, units of measurement
Manual storage location.......................................... 20-1 Global position satellite (gps) date/time settings... 45-30
Refrigerator (If Equipped) ....................................... 20-8 Regional setting, languages, time/date
Seat belts ..................................................... 20-9, 130-5 settings, units of measurement
Steering column .....................................................20-11 Advanced settings................................................. 45-29
Operators station Regional setting, languages, time/date
Adjusting settings, units of measurement
Left-hand armrest (Style A) ................................. 20-7 Regional/languages/units menu setting ................ 45-29
Left-hand armrest (Style B) ................................. 20-7 Remove accumulated crop debris ................. 10-21, 180-5
Operators seat (Style A)...................................... 20-5 Remove and install
Operators seat (Style B)...................................... 20-6 Elevator chain slats............................................... 125-8
Seat back (Style A).............................................. 20-7 Remove and install track shoes................................ 170-2
Seat back (Style B).............................................. 20-7 Replace
Overhead control panel .............................................. 25-1 Engine primary filter .............................................. 125-3
Engine safety filter ................................................ 135-1
P Fuel filters ............................................................. 130-5
Fuel prefilter ............................................... 100-5, 130-8
Park brake switch .............................................. 30-4, 55-2 Thermostats and gaskets...................................... 145-3
Parking the harvester ................................................. 55-3 Torsional dampener blocks ................................... 145-3
Prepare machine for storage .................................... 190-1 Row Width
Primary extractor Adjust .................................................................... 45-22
Inspect ...................................................................115-3
Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3 S
Lubricate ............................................................. 105-10
Operate ................................................................. 60-18 Safety
Remove and install blades.................................. 155-24 Backup alarm .......................................................... 55-3
Start up procedure after blade change ............... 155-25 Battery handling .................................................... 160-5
Pump drive gear case Driving or transporting harvester on public roads ... 55-1
Serial number........................................................ 215-3 Emergency exit ....................................................... 20-2
Pump drive gear case oil Fire extinguisher ........................................ 20-10, 180-5
Change ...................................................... 100-6, 130-1 Locations ................................................ 20-11, 180-5
Check level ......................................................... 105-12 Halogen bulb safety rules ..................................... 160-8
High intensity discharge bulb safety rules............160-11
Q Horn
Multi-function lever .............................................. 30-6
Quantities Machine safety features.......................................... 05-1
Fluids .................................................................... 210-1 Parking the harvester.............................................. 55-3
Remove accumulated crop debris ............. 10-21, 180-5
R Safe maintenance, practice .................................... 10-3
Seat belts ................................................................ 20-9
Radiators Tires, service safely .............................................. 10-19
Clean....................................................................155-11 Transport............................................................... 10-15
Radio Water fire extinguisher
After market radios.................................................. 25-1 Charging............................................................ 180-3
Antenna................................................................... 25-2 Safety stops
CB mounting ........................................................... 25-2 Cab
Controls................................................................... 25-1 Check .................................................................110-8
Switches (if equipped)........................................... 30-14 Suspension
Rear axle service......................................... 100-10, 120-2 Check .................................................................110-8
Recirculation filter Topper
Remove and install ..............................................155-11 Check .................................................................110-8
Recommended fire preventions................................ 180-1 Safety, Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
Refrigerator (If Equipped) ........................................... 20-8 Avoid High-Pressure Fluids .................................. 10-16
Refueling, avoid static electricity risk............... 10-10, 85-2 Safety, Handle Fuel Safely, Avoid Fires
Regional setting, languages, time/date Avoid Fires, Handle Fuel Safely........10-9,
settings, units of measurement............................... 45-28 85-1, 180-4
Index-8 041717
PN=8
Index
Page Page
Safety, Steps and Handholds Remove and install vine cutter knives................. 155-22
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly....................... 10-5 Replace engine primary filter ................................ 125-3
Seat Replace engine safety filter................................... 135-1
Adjusting Replace fuel filters ................................................ 130-5
Armrest................................................................ 20-9 Replace fuel prefilter .................................. 100-5, 130-8
Armrest display.................................................... 20-9 Track tension adjustment...................................... 170-3
Instructional seat ................................................. 20-8 Using a booster battery/battery charger.................. 50-3
Left-hand armrest (Style A) ................................. 20-7 Warning indicator .................................................... 40-1
Left-hand armrest (Style B) ................................. 20-7 Water fire extinguisher
Operators seat (Style A)...................................... 20-5 Charging............................................................ 180-3
Operators seat (Style B)...................................... 20-6 Windhield washer reservoir................................... 155-4
Seat back (Style A).............................................. 20-7 Service advisor diagnostic connector ....................... 20-13
Seat back (Style B).............................................. 20-7 Service interval chart
Seat belts ..................................................... 20-9, 130-5 100 hours ................................................................ 90-4
Secondary extractor ................................................. 60-20 1000 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3 1500 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Lubricate ............................................................. 105-10 2000 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Operate ................................................................. 60-21 25 hours .................................................................. 90-3
Serial number 250 hours ................................................................ 90-4
Pump drive gear case ........................................... 215-3 3000 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Serial Number 4500 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Chopper Gear Case.............................................. 215-4 50 hours .................................................................. 90-3
Service 500 hours ................................................................ 90-4
Adjust primary extractor chain tension................ 155-26 First 100 hours ........................................................ 90-2
Adjust shredder topper shear plates ................... 155-23 Shutoff valve
Air conditioning recirculation filter ........................155-11 Fuel tank ............................................................... 155-5
Base cutter blade ................................................ 155-19 Side knife
Bleeding air from coolant system........................ 155-14 Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3
Change base cutter gear case oil .............. 100-8, 130-3 Side knife blades
Change chopper gear case oil ................... 100-7, 130-2 Remove and install ............................................. 155-22
Change engine oil and replace Side knives
filter ............................................... 100-1, 120-8, 125-1 Lubricate ............................................................. 105-12
Change final drive oil ...................... 100-9, 115-1, 120-1 Sill roller bearing
Change hydraulic filters ............................. 100-4, 135-2 Lubricate ............................................................... 120-7
Change tire ........................................................... 165-3 Specifications
Check cab ground strap........................................ 160-4 Engine................................................................... 210-3
Check engine ground connection ......................... 160-4 Fluids
Check final drive oil................................................110-2 Capacities.......................................................... 210-1
Checking engine air pre-filter ................................ 105-5 Machine components............................................ 210-2
Clean radiators.....................................................155-11 Optional equipment............................................... 210-2
Cleaning engine air pre-filter outer screen............ 105-5 Tires
Component locations .............................................. 90-2 Inflation pressure............................................... 165-1
Engine air filters maintenance............................... 155-8 Size ................................................................... 165-1
Filter Torques ................................................................. 210-5
Air conditioning recirculation ............................155-11 Weight of machine ................................................ 210-4
Fresh air .......................................................... 155-10 Standard
Fresh air filter ...................................................... 155-10 Field harvesting....................................................... 75-3
Fuel tank ............................................................... 155-7 Steering
Grease front wheel hub bearings............... 150-1, 165-2 Column...................................................................20-11
Rear axle.................................................. 100-10, 120-2 Storage
Remove and install Prepare machine................................................... 190-1
Elevator chain slats ........................................... 125-8 Remove machine .................................................. 190-1
Remove and install base cutter blades ............... 155-18 Storing fuel ................................................................. 85-4
Remove and install chopper blades.................... 155-19 Switch
Remove and install primary extractor blades...... 155-24 Cab interior light...................................................... 35-5
Remove and install side knife blades.................. 155-22 Map light ................................................................. 35-5
Remove and install topper blades....................... 155-21 Turn signal .............................................................. 35-5
Remove and install track shoes ............................ 170-2
Index-9 041717
PN=9
Index
Page Page
Index-10 041717
PN=10
John Deere Service Keeps You On The Job
John Deere Parts
We help minimize downtime by putting genuine John
Deere parts in your hands in a hurry.
That’s why we maintain a large and varied inventory—to
stay a jump ahead of your needs.
TS100 —UN—23AUG88
DX,IBC,A -19-04JUN90-1/1
TS101 —UN—23AUG88
DX,IBC,B -19-04JUN90-1/1
Well-Trained Technicians
School is never out for John Deere service technicians.
Training schools are held regularly to be sure our
personnel know your equipment and how to maintain it.
Result?
TS102 —UN—23AUG88
Experience you can count on!
DX,IBC,C -19-04JUN90-1/1
Prompt Service
Our goal is to provide prompt, efficient care when you
want it and where you want it.
We can make repairs at your place or at ours, depending
on the circumstances: see us, depend on us.
TS103 —UN—23AUG88
DX,IBC,D -19-04JUN90-1/1
041717
IBC-1 PN=379
John Deere Service Keeps You On The Job
041717
IBC-2 PN=380
John Deere Service Keeps You On The Job
041717
IBC-3 PN=381